JP2014079299A5 - - Google Patents

Description

Game machine

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

One type of gaming machine is a pachinko machine. The pachinko machine, the game balls that were struck by the firing device is ball entrance to the starting ball entrance means provided on the game board, together with whether the lottery to generate an equivalent or condition is performed, the lottery in the variable display device The variation display for teaching the result is performed (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

  In recent years, operation means has been provided in which contents such as effects are changed or choices are determined by a player's operation.

JP 2003-154110 A

  However, in recent years, operating devices are generally provided, and any gaming machine maker produces effects according to the operation of similar operating devices. There is a risk. Note that the above-described problem is not limited to pachinko machines, but also applies to other gaming machines such as slot machines.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of giving a novel and interesting to an input operation.

The gaming machine of the present invention is
Operation means provided at a position operable by the player;
In a gaming machine comprising operation detection means for detecting an operation on the operation means,
A plurality of interlocking means mechanically interlocking with the displacement of the operation unit;
It comprises an object switching means for switching the interlocking means that interlocks with the displacement of the operation unit among the plurality of interlocking means.

The gaming machine may be a pachinko machine, a slot machine, or a gaming machine of a type in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined.

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, novel interest can be provided with respect to input operation.

It is a front view which shows the pachinko machine in one Embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the inner frame and the front frame set. It is a front view which shows structures, such as an inner frame and a game board. It is a rear view which shows the structure of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the inner frame, the back pack unit, etc. FIG. It is a block diagram which shows the main electrical structures of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline | summary of the various counters used for game control. It is a flowchart which shows the main process by the main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process by the main controller. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows a NMI interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows a start winning process. It is a flowchart which shows a jackpot determination process. It is a flowchart which shows a classification determination process. It is a flowchart which shows reach determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows a through gate passage process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st display control process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation | variation display setting process. It is a flowchart which shows discrimination | determination information setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows a variable winning apparatus control process. It is a flowchart which shows an end setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd display control process. It is a flowchart which shows an opportunity corresponding unit control process. It is a flowchart which shows a reception interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of the payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows a command determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process of a sub control apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline | summary of the various counters used for the determination of a decoration design, etc. It is a flowchart which shows the update process of a counter. It is a flowchart which shows holding information storage processing. It is a flowchart which shows a pending | holding process. It is a flowchart which shows a jackpot display process. It is a top view of an upper plate. It is sectional drawing of an effect button unit. It is sectional drawing of an effect button unit. It is sectional drawing of an effect button unit. It is sectional drawing of an effect button unit. It is a flowchart which shows additional production | presentation setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows an effective period preparation process. It is a flowchart which shows action input processing. It is a flowchart which shows a button production execution process. It is a flowchart which shows an air production | presentation execution process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an action group selection table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an action pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a button production | presentation selection table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an air production | presentation selection table. It is a front exploded schematic diagram which shows the interlocking mechanism in another embodiment. It is a side surface exploded schematic diagram which shows the interlocking mechanism in another embodiment.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. As shown in FIG. 3 and the like, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that constitutes an outline of the pachinko machine 10, and an inner frame 12 is supported at one side of the outer frame 11 so as to be opened and closed. . For the sake of convenience, FIG. 3 omits illustrations of nails and accessories placed on the surface of the game board 30, the glass unit 137 attached to the front frame set 14, and the like.

  As shown in FIG. 6 and the like, the outer frame 11 has an upper side frame constituting portion 11a and a lower side frame constituting portion 11b made of a wooden plate material, and the left side frame constituting portion 11c and the right side frame constituting portion 11d are made of aluminum alloy. Each of the frame components 11a to 11d is assembled in a rectangular frame shape as a whole by a detachable fastener such as a screw.

  An upper hinge 81 and a lower hinge 82 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the left side frame constituting portion 11c (see FIG. 1). The upper and lower hinges 81 and 82 support the upper and lower portions of the inner frame 12 so that the inner frame 12 can be rotated. As a result, the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed. And the inner frame 12 etc. are accommodated in the space part formed inside the outer frame 11.

  The right side frame constituting portion 11d is formed with an extending wall portion 83 that protrudes from the vicinity of the rear end portion in the width direction toward the inside of the outer frame 11. The extending wall 83 covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 (see FIG. 6) provided on the back side of the right side of the inner frame 12 from the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 5). In addition, as shown in FIG. 3, a pair of upper and lower receiving portions 84 and 85 to which the locking member of the locking device 600 is locked are provided on the front surface side of the extending wall portion 83. Further, a pressing portion 86 that abuts on an inner frame opening detection switch 92 described later is provided on the lower receiving portion 85 so as to protrude toward the inner side of the outer frame 11.

  Furthermore, a resin curtain decoration 87 is attached to the lower frame constituting portion 11b. A rib 88 projecting upward is integrally formed at the back of the upper surface of the curtain decoration 87. This makes it difficult to form a gap with the inner frame 12.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the opening / closing axis of the inner frame 12 is set up and down on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10, so that the inner frame 12 can be opened forward with the opening / closing axis serving as an axis. It has become. The inner frame 12 is mainly composed of a resin base 38 whose outer shape is rectangular, and a substantially elliptical window hole 39 is formed at the center of the resin base 38.

  A front frame set 14 is attached to the front side of the inner frame 12 so that it can be opened and closed. As with the inner frame 12, the front frame set 14 can be opened forward with an opening / closing axis set along the top and bottom on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, you may comprise the front frame set 14 so that it may be supported by the outer frame 11 so that opening is possible directly rather than via the inner frame 12.

  The front frame set 14 has a rectangular outer shape like the inner frame 12, and covers almost the entire front side of the inner frame 12 in the closed state. A substantially elliptical window 101 is formed at the center of the front frame set 14. Thereby, the game board 30 (game area) attached to the rear surface of the inner frame 12 can be visually recognized from the outside through the window portion 101 of the front frame set 14 and the window hole 39 of the inner frame 12. The detailed configuration of the game board 30 will be described later.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, a front plate of the front frame set 14 is provided with a lower plate 15 as a ball receiving tray at the center of the lower portion, and the game balls discharged from the discharge port 16 are placed in the lower plate 15. It can be stored inside. In addition, on the front side of the lower plate 15, a ball removal lever 25 for discharging the game ball from the lower plate 15 is provided. In addition, an effect button 125 with a built-in LED is provided on the left side of the lower plate 15, and by pressing the effect button 125, a corresponding effect is performed on a decorative symbol display device 42 described later. Or the production content is changed.

  On the right side of the lower plate 15, a game ball launching handle (hereinafter simply referred to as a handle) 18 protruding toward the front side is provided. The handle 18 is provided with a touch sensor (not shown) and an operation amount detection means (variable resistor) (not shown) for detecting the operation amount of the operation unit of the handle 18. When the handle 18 is rotated clockwise, a game ball is launched by a launching device 60 serving as launching means described later with a strength corresponding to the amount of pivoting operation. Further, the handle 18 is provided with a firing prohibiting button 18 a that can be pressed with the thumb of the right hand that holds the handle 18. In the state where the firing prohibition button 18a is pressed, even if the handle 18 is held, the launching device 60 is prohibited from launching the game ball. Therefore, the rotation of the handle 18 can be performed while prohibiting the launch of the game ball, or the launch of the game ball can be temporarily stopped while the handle 18 is held.

  Above the lower plate 15, an upper plate 19 is provided as a storage supply unit. On the upper surface side of the upper plate 19, a storage recess 19a for temporarily storing the game balls and guiding them to a launching device 60 described later while being aligned in a row is formed. When the upper plate 19 is full of game balls, the game balls to be paid out are guided to the lower plate 15 via the lower plate communication passage 71 and the discharge port 16 described later.

  A ball lending button 121, a return button 122, and a ball removal button 123 are provided to the right of the storage recess 19 a of the upper plate 19. In a game hall or the like, when the ball lending button 121 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, a lending ball is changed according to the operation. It is supplied to the upper plate 19. On the other hand, the return button 122 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. However, the ball lending button 121 and the return button 122 are not necessary for a pachinko machine in which game balls are directly lending to the upper plate 19 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, so-called cash machine. Further, when the ball removal button 123 is pressed, a communication hole (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the ball guide path of the upper plate 19 and communicating with the lower plate 15 is opened and stored in the upper plate 19. The game balls that have been placed are guided (dropped) to the lower plate 15. That is, the player can move the game ball on the upper plate 19 to the lower plate 15 at any time by operating the ball removal button 123.

  In addition, light emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front surface of the front frame set 14. These light emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game while the light emission mode is changed and controlled according to a change in the gaming state. For example, at the periphery of the window portion 101, an annular illumination portion 102 incorporating a light emitting means such as an LED is provided. In addition, error display lamps 104 that are turned on when a predetermined error occurs are provided on both sides of the annular illumination portion 102. In addition, a large number of small through holes are formed in the annular illumination portion 102 above the error display lamps 104 corresponding to the speakers SP (see FIG. 3) provided on the back surface of the front frame set 14. .

  A glass unit 137 is attached to the back side of the front frame set 14. The glass unit 137 is not attached to a pair of conventional front and rear rectangular glass plates separately in front and rear pairs, but is formed into a round shape as a whole and attached after being assembled.

  Next, the inner frame 12 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the game board 30 is mounted on the inner frame 12 in a state where the game board 30 is in contact with the back side of the resin base 38 on the rear side of the window hole 39. Accordingly, the substantially central portion of the front surface of the game board 30 is exposed to the front surface side of the inner frame 12 through the window hole 39.

  Further, a launching device 60 and a launching rail 61 for guiding a game ball immediately after being launched by the launching device 60 are attached to the lower part of the front surface of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38), that is, a position below the window hole 39. Yes. In the present embodiment, a solenoid-type firing device is employed as the firing device 60. Further, above the launching device 60, a ball feeding device that guides the game balls guided from the upper plate 19 one by one to the firing position of the launching device 60 by driving a built-in driving means (for example, a solenoid). 63 is provided.

  Next, the configuration of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. The game board 30 includes a general winning port 31, a variable winning device 32, a starting winning unit (starting port) 33, a through gate 34, a variable display device unit 35, a first special display device 43L and a second special display device 43R. A specific lamp 40 or the like is provided. As is well known, when a game ball enters (wins) various winning holes such as a general winning hole 31, a variable winning device 32 as a variable winning means, a starting winning unit 33, etc., it is detected by various detection switches, and the upper plate 19 or A predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the lower plate 15. For example, when there is a ball entering the start winning unit 33, there are three balls when there is a ball entering the general winning slot 31, and when there is a ball entering the variable winning device 32. Fifteen game balls are paid out. It should be noted that a variety of winning mouths where a predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out (awarded with a prize ball) in accordance with the winning (winning) of the game balls correspond to winning means. In addition, the game board 30 is provided with an out port 36, and the game balls that have not won the various winning ports such as the general winning port 31 are discharged out of the game area through the out port 36. . In addition, the game board 30 is provided with a large number of nails for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the game balls, and various members such as windmills (servants).

  The variable prize-winning device 32 is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won, and is in an open state in which a game ball can be won in a big hit state. Although not shown in the drawings, the variable prize winning device 32 includes a big prize opening leading to the rear of the game board 30, a shutter for opening and closing the big prize opening, a big prize opening solenoid for operating the shutter, and a big prize. And a count switch 223 for detecting a game ball that has entered the mouth, driving and controlling the big prize opening solenoid, and opening and closing the shutter, so that the variable prize winning device 32 (large prize winning opening) is in a closed state and an open state. Switching.

  The start winning unit 33 includes an upper winning opening 33a and a lower winning opening 33b, and a pair of opening and closing members 33c provided on both sides of the lower winning opening 33b. When the opening / closing member 33c opens and closes in response to the establishment of a predetermined condition, the game ball flowing down the side of the lower prize opening 33b is guided between an open state where the game ball is guided to the lower prize opening 33b and a closed state where the game ball is not guided. The state can be changed. As will be described in detail later, the start winning unit 33 includes a first start winning switch 224a and a second starting winning switch 224b that detect game balls that have entered the upper winning opening 33a and the lower winning opening 33b, respectively. In addition, when a game ball is detected by the start winning switch 224a, 224b, a winning lottery for determining whether or not to generate a big hit state is performed, and special display devices 43L, 43R (and variable display means described later) In the decorative symbol display device 42), a variable display for teaching the result of the success / failure lottery is performed. Then, when a big win is won in the winning / losing lottery, a big win state is given as a special gaming state in which the variable winning device 32 is opened.

  Further, in the present embodiment, there are a low probability state in which a jackpot is won with a predetermined probability in the success / failure lottery and a high probability state in which the jackpot is won with a higher probability than the low probability state in the success / failure lottery. Further, the opening / closing member 33c is opened relatively frequently, and it is easy to allow the game ball to enter the lower winning opening 33c, and the opening / closing member 33c is hardly opened, and the game ball is moved to the lower winning opening 33b. There is a low entry state that is difficult to enter. Hereinafter, the low probability state and the low entry state are referred to as “normal mode”, and the low probability state and the high entry state are referred to as “time reduction mode”. A certain state is referred to as a “probability change mode”.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the normal mode and the probability variation mode are continued until the jackpot state occurs, whereas the time reduction mode is the special display devices 43L and 43R and the decorative symbol display device 42 even if the jackpot state does not occur. When the fluctuation display in is performed 100 times, the display is terminated and the mode is shifted to the normal mode.

  The jackpot types of the present embodiment are 16 round probability variation jackpot (hereinafter referred to as “16RS”), 7 round probability variation jackpot (hereinafter referred to as “7RS”), and 7 round normal jackpot (hereinafter referred to as “7RN”). There are three types. Regarding “16RS”, it is assumed that the variable winning device 32 is opened for 30 seconds or that eight game balls enter the variable winning device 32 after the variable winning device 32 is opened. It is repeated 16 times, while for “7RS” it is repeated 7 times before the jackpot state ends. In addition, “probability change mode” is given after the big hit state of “16RS” and “7RS”, and “time reduction mode” is given after the big hit state of “7RN”.

  Each of the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R is configured by a 7-segment display device of a type capable of displaying two characters (and dots), and can be visually recognized by the player (in this example, the variable winning device 32). It is installed on the right). Then, when the game ball enters the top winning port 33a of the start winning unit 33, the first special display device 43L performs switching display (variable display), and the game ball enters the lower winning port 33b. As a trigger, switching display (variation display) is performed on the second special display device 43R. Note that the display contents of the special display devices 43L and 43R are directly controlled by a main control device 261 as main control means described later.

  In addition, after the variable display is performed on the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R, the result of the lottery determination, that is, “big hit” or “off”, depending on the display mode when the variable display stops. It is definitely displayed that there is. For example, when a game ball wins the top winning opening 33a, the lighting mode (combination of segments to be lit) is switched and displayed (variable display, for example, every 4 msec) on the corresponding first special display device 43L. When a predetermined time has elapsed, one of the lighting modes is stopped and displayed (for example, stopped for several seconds). Then, when “big hit” is won in the winning / losing lottery, the corresponding lighting mode is displayed when the fluctuation is stopped, and a big hit state occurs.

  Further, in the special display devices 43L and 43R, not only is it taught that the “big hit” is won, but the type of the big hit state, ie, “16RS”, “7RS”, or “7RN”. Is also taught. For example, when “7.7.” Is finally displayed (stopped) on the first special display device 43L (or the second special display device 43R), “16RS” is assigned, and “n. “0.” is displayed, it is associated with “7RN”. Further, there are a plurality of stop modes of the special display devices 43L and 43R that teach one jackpot type instead of one, and any one of them is selected and stopped and displayed. In addition, when either the first special display device 43L or the second special display device 43R is performing variable display or determination display, the other is turned off ("-" is displayed). However, if neither the change display nor the determination display is performed in either case, “-” is displayed in both cases.

  In addition, when a game ball newly wins the start winning unit 33 during the variation display of the first or second special display device 43L, 43R, the corresponding variation display is performed at that time. It is the structure performed after the end of. That is, the variable display is on standby (held). The maximum number of the variable display to be held is determined for each model of the pachinko machine, but in the present embodiment, it corresponds to the game ball won in the top winning port 33a and the game ball won in the lower winning port 33b. Then, the variation display up to four times (total eight variation display) is put on hold.

  Further, the number of holdings of the variation display (hereinafter referred to as “first variation display”) based on the game ball entering the top winning opening 33a is lit and displayed by the first holding lamp 46a that can emit blue light. The number of holdings of the variation display (hereinafter referred to as “second variation display”) based on the game ball entering the lower prize opening 33b is lit and displayed by the second holding lamp 46b that can emit red light. It has become. Four hold lamps 46a and 46b are provided in the same number as the maximum number of hold of each of the first change display and the second change display, and the same number as the number of the first change display or the second change display held. Light. The display contents of the hold lamps 46a and 46b are controlled by a sub-control device 262 as sub-control means described later. If a new game ball wins the start winning unit 33 during the big hit state, the corresponding change display is also suspended.

  Note that the suspended variation display is basically digested in the suspended sequence, but both the first variation display and the second variation display are suspended (hold lamp 46a, When one or more of 46b is lit, the second variation display is preferentially digested. In other words, unless all the second variation display triggered by winning at the lower winning opening 33b is digested, the first variation display triggered by entering the upper winning opening 33a is not performed. ing. For example, in the state where one first holding lamp 46a is lit, when a game ball enters the lower prize opening 33b and one second holding lamp 46b lights, the first variation display is postponed, First, the second variation display is performed.

  In the variation specifying lamp 40, the variation display performed on the decorative symbol display device 42 corresponds to which one of the top winning opening 33a and the lower winning opening 33b (first variation display or second variation display). It is for showing which one of the display is variable), and is arranged at a position (below the special display devices 43L and 43R in this example) that is visible from the player. The variation specifying lamp 40 includes an LED whose emission color is blue and an LED whose emission color is red. When the first variation display is performed on the decorative symbol display device 42, the variation specifying lamp 40 emits blue light, and the second variation. It emits red light when it is being displayed.

  The through gate 34 is configured such that game balls flowing down the game area can pass one by one. As will be described in detail later, the through gate 34 includes a through gate switch 225 that can detect a game ball passing through the through gate 34. When the game ball is detected by the through gate switch 225, the through gate 34 is started. A pitch assist lottery for determining whether or not the winning unit 33 is in an open state is performed, and a variation display for teaching the result of the pitch assist lottery is performed on the normal symbol display device 41. Then, when winning in the winning assist lottery, the lower winning opening 33b (opening / closing member 33c) of the start winning unit 33 is opened for a specified time after the end of the variation display.

  The variable display device unit 35 includes a normal symbol display device 41 that variably displays triggered by the passage of the through gate 34, and a decorative symbol display device that variably displays in accordance with the variable display by the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R. 42 is provided. Further, the variable display device unit 35 is provided with the first holding lamp 46a, the second holding lamp 46b, and the holding lamp 44.

  The normal symbol display device 41 is configured so that “○” or “×” can be lit as a normal symbol. For example, each time a game ball passes through the through gate 34, the normal symbol is displayed as “O” → “×” → “○” →... Is displayed at high speed (change display). Then, when the change display is stopped for several seconds with the “◯” symbol (winning symbol), the start winning unit 33 (opening / closing member 33c) is opened for a predetermined time. The display contents of the normal symbol display device 41 are directly controlled by a main control device 261 described later.

  In addition, when a game ball newly passes through the through gate 34 during the fluctuation display of the normal symbol display device 41, the corresponding fluctuation display is performed after the end of the fluctuation display at that time. It has become. That is, the variable display is on standby (held). The maximum number of the variable display to be held is determined for each model of the pachinko machine, but in this embodiment, it is held up to 4 times, and the hold number is lit and displayed by the hold lamp 44. Yes.

  The decorative symbol display device 42 of the present embodiment is configured by a liquid crystal display device, and is configured to be capable of variably displaying decorative symbols as identification information. The display contents of the decorative symbol display device 42 are controlled by a sub-control device 262 and a display control device 45 which will be described later. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 42, the sub-control device 262 supports the auxiliary design based on the command from the main control device 261 so as to correspond to the results displayed on the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R. Display content is determined, and display control is performed by the display control device 45 based on the determination.

  The decorative symbol display device 42 includes, for example, three symbol display areas, upper, middle, and lower, and a plurality of types of decorative symbols (for example, numeric symbols with numbers 1 to 9) are provided in each symbol display area. Displayed sequentially (variably displayed), and then the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in order for each symbol display area (for example, in the order of the upper symbol display area → the lower symbol display area → the middle symbol display area). . For example, when the occurrence of the big hit state is determined by the main control device 261, a display corresponding to the big hit is made on the first or second special display device 43L, 43R, and the decorative symbol is hit on the decorative symbol display device 42. (For example, the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display area, the middle symbol display area, and the lower symbol display area are the same), and the jackpot state is started.

  Further, when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination corresponding to the jackpot, as the previous stage, for example, the same decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area. In this way, the state where the same symbol is stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area and the variable display is still being performed in the middle symbol display area is the reach state. Of course, the occurrence of a reach condition does not necessarily result in a big hit, but may be missed.

  In the present embodiment, after the reach state occurs, in the middle symbol display area, the same decorative symbol as the decorative symbol (reach symbol) stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display region and the lower symbol display region is stopped (Zoro). If the eye is stopped and displayed), the jackpot state is given. Further, in the case of an odd number of eyes, “16RS” or “7RS” to which the probability variation mode is given after the jackpot state ends, and in the case of an even number of eyes, “16RS”, “7RS”, Alternatively, either “7RN” is given. In addition, the combination of decorative symbols other than the doublet basically teaches “displacement”.

  The variable display device unit 35 is provided with a center frame 47 so as to surround the decorative symbol display device 42. A ball entrance 151 is provided in the upper portion of the center frame 47, and a game ball that has entered the ball entrance 151 is formed inside the center frame 47 along the side of the decorative symbol display device 42. It is guided on a stage 153 formed below the decorative symbol display device 42 via a warp channel 152 extending vertically. The game ball guided on the stage 153 falls from the stage 153 to the front game area, or rolls on the stage 153 and then enters the pocket 154 formed at the center back side of the stage 153. . The pocket 154 communicates with a guide passage 155 that leads to a game area directly above the start winning unit 33 (upward winning opening 33a), and a game ball that has entered the pocket 154 has a relatively high probability. The start winning unit 33 (upward winning opening 33a) is entered.

  The game board 30 includes an inner rail component 51 and an outer rail component 52, and a rail 50 that guides a game ball launched from the launch device 60 to the upper part of the game board 30 is attached. As a result, the game balls fired in accordance with the turning operation of the handle 18 are guided through the launch rail 61 and the rail 50 into a game area formed between the game board 30 and the glass unit 137.

  A return ball preventing member 53 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail constituting portion 51 (the upper left portion in FIG. 4). This prevents a situation in which the game ball once guided from the rail 50 to the game area returns to the rail 50 again. Further, a return rubber 54 is attached to a substantially distal end portion (upper right portion in FIG. 4) of the outer rail constituting portion 52. The game ball fired at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 54 and is returned to, for example, the substantially central portion of the game board 30.

  In the present embodiment, the outer rail component 52 is interrupted at the upper right portion of the game board 30, and the inner rail component 51 is interrupted at the lower right portion of the game board 30. For this reason, the game area is defined by the inner peripheral surface of the rail 50 and the window hole 39 of the resin base 38. However, since the game ball launched by the launching device 60 may flow backward through the rail 50 until it passes through the return ball prevention member 53, the parallel portions of the inner and outer rail constituting portions 51 and 52 are excluded from the game area. It is burned.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a ball passage unit 70 is provided on the back side of the front frame set 14 below the window portion 101. The ball passage unit 70 includes a lower plate communication passage 71 connected from a payout mechanism portion 352 described later to the discharge port 16 of the lower plate 15, and an upper plate communication passage 73 connected from the payout mechanism portion 352 to the upper plate 19. In addition, there is a predetermined gap between the firing rail 61 provided on the front side of the inner frame 12 and the rail unit 50 (outer rail constituting portion 52), and the ball path unit 70 of the front frame set 14 includes A foul ball passage 72 is formed to guide the game ball dropped from the gap to the lower plate 15. Thereby, if the game ball launched from the launching device 60 does not reach the return ball prevention member 53 and returns to the rail 50 as a foul ball, the foul ball is returned to the lower plate 15 via the foul ball passage 72. Discharged.

  3 and 4 is a payout passage for guiding a game ball paid out by a payout mechanism portion 352, which will be described later, to the front of the inner frame 12, and an upper plate communication passage 73 (upper plate 19). And a passage leading to the lower plate communication passage 71 (lower plate 15). A shutter 68 is provided below the payout passage 67. When the front frame set 14 is opened, the shutter 68 protrudes forward by an urging force of a spring or the like so that the outlet of the payout passage 67 is almost closed. ing. When the front frame set 14 is closed, the shutter 68 is pushed open by the inlet side rear end of the lower plate communication path 71. In addition, the inlets (sphere inflow portions) of the lower plate communication passage 71 and the upper plate communication passage 73 are adjacent to each other, and in the closed state of the front frame set 14, the inlets and the discharge passage 67 are separated by a predetermined distance. A game ball can pass through the gap between the two. For this reason, when the upper plate 19 and the upper plate communication passage 73 are filled with game balls, the game balls to be dispensed flow to the lower plate communication passage 71 side (overflow to the inlet side of the lower plate communication passage 71), and the lower plate connection It will be paid out to the lower plate 15 through the passage 71.

  In addition, the ball path unit 70 is provided with a full detection switch (not shown) that detects a game ball located in the lower dish communication path 71. Due to the presence of the full detection switch, it is grasped that the lower plate 15 is full of game balls (the lower plate 15 is full of game balls and the game balls are retained in the lower plate communication path 71). be able to. In the present embodiment, based on the fact that a game ball is continuously detected for a predetermined time by the full detection switch, an error notification that teaches that the lower plate 15 is full using a display or sound on the decorative symbol display device 42 is used. Is controlled. When the game ball stays in the lower tray communication path 71 and the game ball is not detected by the full detection switch (when it is not detected continuously for a predetermined time), the error notification state is canceled.

  Next, the back configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. Various control boards are arranged on the back of the pachinko machine 10 so as to be lined up, down, left and right, and partially overlapped in the front and back, and further, a game ball supply device (payout mechanism) for supplying game balls And a protective cover made of resin. The dispensing mechanism and the protective cover are integrated as one unit, and the resin portion is generally sometimes referred to as a back pack. Therefore, this unit is referred to as a “back pack unit 203”.

  First, the back configuration of the game board 30 will be described. As shown in FIG. 6, on the back side of the variable display device unit 35 (see FIG. 4) arranged corresponding to the through hole in the center of the game board 30, a resin frame cover that covers the center frame 47 from the back side. 213 is provided to protrude rearward. Further, on the back side of the frame cover 213, a decorative symbol display device 42, a display control device 45, and a sub control device 262, which are liquid crystal display devices facing forward from the opening of the frame cover 213, can be attached and detached in a state where they are stacked in front and back. Is attached.

  The decorative symbol display device 42 is housed in a housing box 42 a in which an opening for exposing the display unit (liquid crystal screen) of the decorative symbol display device 42 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 is formed, and the rear surface of the frame cover 213. It is fixed on the side. The display control device 45 is accommodated in the substrate box 45a and fixed to the back side of the decorative symbol display device 42 (accommodation box 42a). The sub-control device 262 is accommodated in the substrate box 262a and fixed to the back side of the display control device 45 (substrate box 45a). In the frame cover 213, an LED control board for driving LEDs and the like built in the center frame 47 is disposed. The storage box 42a and the substrate boxes 45a and 262a are made of a transparent resin material or the like so that the inside can be visually recognized.

  Under the frame cover 213, a back frame set 215 is attached to the game board 30 so as to cover the general winning opening 31, the variable winning device 32, the start winning unit 33 and the like from behind. The back frame set 215 includes a ball collection mechanism (not shown) for collecting game balls that have won prizes in various winning ports. The game balls collected by the ball collection mechanism are guided to a discharge passage portion 217 described later, and discharged from the discharge chute of the discharge passage portion 217 to the outside of the pachinko machine 10.

  In the present embodiment, the back frame set 215 functions as a mounting base for the main controller 261. More specifically, the board box 263 on which the main controller 261 is mounted is pivotally supported with respect to the back frame set 215 and can be opened rearward.

  The main controller 261 is accommodated in a substrate box 263 made of a transparent resin material or the like. The substrate box 263 includes a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing member. The board | substrate box 263 connected with the sealing member becomes a structure which cannot be opened unless a predetermined trace is left. As a result, it is possible to easily find out that the board box 263 has been illegally opened.

  In addition, the game board 30 is provided with a ball entry detection switch for detecting game balls that have entered the various winning ports corresponding to various winning ports such as the general winning port 31. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, a winning opening switch 221 is provided at a position corresponding to the general winning opening 31, and a count switch 223 is provided in the variable winning device 32. The start winning unit 33 is provided with a first start winning switch 224a and a second starting winning switch 224b corresponding to the upper winning port 33a and the lower winning port 33b, respectively. Further, a through gate switch 225 is provided at a position corresponding to the through gate 34.

  Although not shown, the back frame set 215 is provided with a first board relay board that is electrically connected to the prize opening switch 221, the count switch 223, and the through gate switch 225 via a cable connector. . This first board surface relay board relays the prize opening switch 221 and the like and the main control device 261 as main control means, and is electrically connected to the main control device 261 via a cable connector. On the other hand, the start winning switches 224a and 224b are directly connected to the main controller 261 via a connector cable without passing through a relay board.

The detection results detected by the various entrance detection switches are taken into the main controller 261. Then, a payout command (the number of game balls to be paid out) corresponding to the winning situation at each time is transmitted from the main control device 261 to the payout control device 311, and a predetermined number of game balls are based on the output signal from the payout control device 311. Is dispensed (except when detected by the through gate switch 225).
In addition, although not shown in the drawings, the back of the game board 30 is provided with a large winning opening solenoid that opens the large winning opening by the variable winning apparatus 32, and the start winning unit 33 has a pair of opening / closing members 33c. A winning opening solenoid that opens and closes is provided. The back frame set 215 is also provided with a second board surface relay board (not shown) that relays between the solenoid and the main controller 261.

  Next, the configuration of the back pack unit 203 will be described. As shown in FIG. 5, the back pack unit 203 is a unit in which a back pack 351 formed of resin and a payout mechanism portion 352 for a game ball are integrated. Further, the back pack unit 203 is supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the left side portion (right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12, and can be opened rearward with an open / close axis extending along the vertical direction as an axis. ing. In addition, an external terminal board 240 is provided on the upper left part of the back pack unit 203 (upper right part in FIG. 5).

  The external terminal board 240 is for relaying various information transmissions to a hall computer or the like in a game hall, and is provided with a plurality of external connection terminals. For convenience, no reference numerals are given, but for example, a terminal for outputting information relating to the current gaming state (such as jackpot state or probability variation mode), front frame set 14 or inner frame detected by opening detection switches 91 and 92 described later. Terminals for outputting information related to the opening of 12, terminals for outputting information on various error states such as a ball entry error, a lower tray full tank error, a tank ball no error, a payout error, and a prize paid out from the payout control device 311 Terminals for outputting information on the number of balls are provided.

  The back pack 351 is integrally formed of, for example, ABS resin, and includes a protective cover portion 354 that protrudes rearward from the pachinko machine 10 and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover 354 has a shape in which the left and right side surfaces and the upper surface are closed and only the lower surface is opened, and has a size sufficient to cover at least the frame cover 213. However, in the present embodiment, the protective cover portion 354 covers the upper portion and the right portion of the substrate box 263 (the left portion in FIG. 5). Thereby, in the closed state of the back pack unit 203, the sealing member provided at the right part of the board box 263 and the terminal part (board side connector) provided along the upper edge part of the main controller 261 are covered. It will be.

  The payout mechanism 352 is arranged so as to bypass the protective cover 354. That is, a tank 355 opened upward is provided above the protective cover portion 354, and game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially supplied to the tank 355. Below the tank 355, for example, a tank rail 356 that has two rows of ball passages in the horizontal direction and that is gently inclined toward the downstream side is connected. Further, a case rail 357 is formed vertically on the downstream side of the tank rail 356. It is connected. The payout device 358 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 357, and a required number of game balls are paid out appropriately according to a predetermined electrical configuration such as a payout motor. Then, the game balls paid out from the payout device 358 are supplied to the upper plate 19 and the like.

  The payout mechanism 352 is provided with a payout relay board 381 for relaying a payout command signal from the payout control device 311 to the payout device 358, and a power switch board 382 for taking in the main power from the outside. Yes. The power switch board 382 is supplied with, for example, an AC 24V main power supply via a voltage converter, and the power switch 382a is switched on or off by a switching operation of the power switch 382a. The payout mechanism is configured by the payout mechanism 352, the payout control device 311 and the like.

  Below the back pack unit 203 (substrate box 263), there is provided a lower frame set 251 that is pivotally supported at the left side of the inner frame 12 (right side in FIG. 5) and can be opened rearward. As shown in FIG. 6, the lower frame set 251 is formed with a discharge passage portion 217 into which the game balls collected by the ball collection mechanism described above flow, and a game ball is placed in the most downstream portion of the discharge passage portion 217. A discharge chute (not shown) for discharging to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 is formed. In other words, the game balls that have won the respective winning openings such as the general winning opening 31 are gathered through the ball collecting mechanism of the back frame set 215 and further discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute of the discharge passage portion 217. In addition, the out port 36 leads to the discharge passage portion 217 in the same manner, and the game balls that have not won any winning port are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute. In this embodiment, the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are configured separately and can be opened and closed independently. However, the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are integrally formed. It is also good to do.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the payout control device 311, the firing control device 312, the power supply device 313, and the card unit connection board 314 are detachably attached to the back side of the lower frame set 251 in a state where they are stacked in front and back. Is attached.

  The launch control device 312 and the power supply device 313 are accommodated in the substrate box 313a and fixed to the back side of the lower frame set 251. Although the launch control device 312 and the power supply device 313 are described as independent control devices for convenience, they are actually configured by a single board (printed board).

  The payout control device 311 is housed in the substrate box 311a and is fixed to the back side of the substrate box 313a (the launch control device 312 and the power supply device 313). The substrate box 311a in which the dispensing control device 311 is accommodated is provided with a sealing member in the same manner as the substrate box 263 in which the main control device 261 is accommodated, so that an unsealed trace of the substrate box 311a remains. It has become.

  In addition, the card unit connection board 314 is accommodated in the board box 314a and fixed to the back side of the board box 313a (the firing control device 312 and the power supply device 313). Each of the board boxes 311a, 313a, and 314a is made of a transparent resin material or the like so that the inside can be visually recognized.

  Further, the dispensing control device 311 is provided with a state return switch 321 that protrudes outward from the substrate box 311a. For example, when the state return switch 321 is pressed when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogged in the payout motor unit, the payout motor is rotated forward and reverse to eliminate the ball clogging (return to a normal state).

  Further, the power supply device 313 is provided with a RAM erase switch 323 that protrudes outward from the substrate box 313a. This pachinko machine 10 has a backup function, so that even if a power failure occurs, the pachinko machine 10 retains the state at the time of the power failure and can be restored to the state at the time of the power failure when returning from the power failure (power recovery). it can. Therefore, if the power is turned off in a normal procedure (for example, when the game hall is closed), the state before the power is turned off is stored. If you want to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, hold down the RAM erase switch 323 and hold the power .

  As shown in FIG. 6, a locking device 600 is provided on the back side of the right side of the inner frame 12. The locking device 600 includes a cylinder lock 700 (see FIG. 1 and the like) exposed on the front surface side of the front frame set 14, and a key is inserted into the key hole of the cylinder lock 700, and the inside is operated by rotating to one side. The frame 12 can be unlocked, and the front frame set 14 can be unlocked by rotating to the other side. In the present embodiment, the inner frame 12 is locked to the outer frame 11, and the front frame set 14 is locked to the inner frame 12.

  In addition, as described above, the extending wall portion 83 that covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 from the back side of the inner frame 12 is formed in the right side frame constituting portion 11d of the outer frame 11 (FIG. 5). reference). Thereby, it becomes difficult to make a wire etc. approach from the back side of outer frame 11, and to operate locking device 600 with the wire etc. As a result, the defense performance can be improved. Further, the extending wall portion 83 is configured to cover the right end portion (the left end portion in FIG. 5) of the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 from the back side, and in the closed state of the inner frame 12, The back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 cannot be opened.

  As shown in FIG. 4, a front frame open detection switch 91 for detecting the opening of the front frame set 14 is provided on the lower right side of the front side of the inner frame 12 (on the right side of the launching device 60). As shown in FIG. 5, an inner frame opening detection switch 92 for detecting the opening of the inner frame 12 is provided on the lower right side on the back side of the inner frame 12 (lower left in FIG. 5). Each of the front frame opening detection switch 91 and the inner frame opening detection switch 92 includes a detection unit that can move in and out of the switch main body, and the front frame opening detection switch 91 is provided so that the detection unit faces forward. The inner frame opening detection switch 92 is provided so that the detection unit faces rearward. When the detection unit is in a state of protruding from the switch main body, an ON signal is output to the main controller 261, and when the detection unit is pressed toward the switch main body and is immersed in the switch main body, an OFF signal is output. It is configured to output to the main controller 261. That is, when the front frame set 14 is closed, the front frame opening detection switch 91 is turned off when the detection unit is pressed on the back surface of the front frame set 14, and when the front frame set 14 is opened, the detection unit returns to the protruding state. Turns on. Similarly, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the inner frame opening detection switch 92 is turned off by the pressing portion 86 integrally formed with the receiving portion 85 of the outer frame 11 and is detected when the inner frame 12 is opened. The part returns to the protruding state and is turned on.

  Now, as shown in FIG. 2, FIG. 35 etc., in this embodiment, the production | presentation button unit 120 is provided in the upper surface side of the top plate 19 as a storage supply part. In particular, in the present embodiment, the effect button unit 120 is disposed behind the storage recess 19a. The effect button unit 120 includes an effect button 125 as an operation means, and a unit-side proximity detection sensor AE1 that can detect a player's hand adjacent to the effect button 125 in order to operate the effect button 125.

  As shown in FIG. 36, the upper plate 19 is formed with an attachment hole 401 for exposing the effect button 125 attached to the lower surface side of the upper plate 19 upward. The effect button unit 120 has an insertion opening 402 corresponding to the attachment hole 401 and includes an attachment base 403 attached to the upper surface side of the upper plate 19, and the unit side proximity detection sensor AE1 includes the attachment base 403. It is attached to the upper surface side.

  The unit-side proximity detection sensor AE1 is arranged on the left front side of the effect button 125 with the main purpose of detecting the proximity of the player operating the handle 18 with the right hand to the effect button 125 (see FIG. 35). . Furthermore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1 etc., it is between the upper plate 19 and the window part 101 in the up-down direction of the front frame set 14, and substantially the same as the unit side proximity detection sensor AE1 in the left-right direction. A frame side proximity detection sensor AE2 is provided for the same position. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, basically, the player's hand moves the effect button 125 when the detection is performed by both the unit-side proximity detection sensor AE1 and the frame-side proximity detection sensor AE2. It will be determined that it is close to. In the present embodiment, the unit side proximity detection sensor AE1 and the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2 constitute a proximity detection means.

  As shown in FIG. 36, the effect button 125 is a housing 404 fixed inside the upper plate 19, and is accommodated inside the housing 404, and is substantially provided so as to be relatively displaceable up and down with respect to the housing 404. A cylindrical main body portion 405 and an operation portion 406 that is inserted inside the main body portion 405 and that can be vertically displaced relative to the main body portion 405 are provided.

  The housing 404 is provided with a stepping motor 407 as driving means for displacing the main body portion 405 up and down, and a pinion 408 for transmitting the driving force of the stepping motor 407 to the main body portion 405. On the other hand, on the outer surface of the main body portion 405, a pair of rack portions 409 extending vertically and meshing with the pinion 408 are provided. When the stepping motor 407 is driven, the main body 405 is displaced upward or downward relative to the housing 404 (upper plate 19). Although not shown in the drawing, a pair of guide rails extending vertically are provided in the main body 405 so that the rack portion 409 and the pinion 408 are not disengaged, and the housing 404 supports each guide rail. Each pair of guide protrusions is provided.

  The operation unit 406 has a substantially cylindrical shape with an outer diameter that is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the main body unit 405, and has a substantially cylindrical shape that is attached to a lower part of the upper component part 411 and an upper component part 411 whose upper part is closed. And a lower component 412. The upper component portion 411 is made of a transparent resin, and a locking portion 415 capable of locking the LED substrate 413 on which the three-color LED 414 is mounted is provided on the inner side. Further, the upper surface of the upper component 411 is marked with “PUSH”, and the operation surface of the effect button 125 is configured by the upper surface. Furthermore, a wiring hole 417 and a heat radiation hole 418 through which the wiring 416 of the LED substrate 413 passes are formed in the upper component part 411. Although not shown, three guide rails extending vertically are provided on the outer surface of the upper component portion 411 so that the operation portion 406 can be smoothly slid up and down without rotating inside the main body portion 405. In addition, a pair of guide projections for supporting the guide rails are provided inside the main body 405.

  The lower component 412 is colored (for example, amber or black), has a base cylinder 421 having the same outer diameter as the upper component 411, a support wall 422 that closes the upper portion of the base cylinder 421, and an inner diameter of the upper component 411. A substantially cylindrical mounting cylinder 423 having substantially the same outer diameter and protruding upward from the upper surface of the support wall 422 is provided. The mounting cylinder 423 is provided concentrically with the base cylinder 421, and a male screw is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the mounting cylinder 423. On the other hand, a female screw is formed at the lower part of the inner peripheral surface of the upper component 411. Then, after the LED substrate 413 is installed inside the upper component 411, the upper component 411 is screwed to the portion where the female screw of the upper component 411 is formed and the mounting cylinder 423 of the lower component 412. 411 and the lower component 412 are integrated to form the operation unit 406.

  The support wall 422 is formed with a plurality of upper support protrusions 425 that protrude downward from the lower surface and support the upper portion of the coil spring 424 as a biasing means that biases the operation portion 406 upward. Yes. On the other hand, a plurality of lower support protrusions 426 for supporting the lower portion of the coil spring 424 are provided on the bottom surface of the main body 405 at a portion facing the upper support protrusion 425. Then, by attaching the coil spring 424 between the upper support protrusion 425 and the lower support protrusion 426, the operation part 406 is biased upward with respect to the main body part 405. In addition, although not shown, the main body 405 has a stopper that protrudes toward the inner peripheral side of the main body 405 with respect to the upper edge of the main body 405 after the operation unit 406 is mounted on the main body 405. As a result, the operation unit 406 is prevented from falling off the main body 405. In this embodiment, the guide rail of the operation unit 406 is provided on the upper component 411. However, the guide rail of the operation unit 406 is provided on the lower component 412, and the positioning reliability between the upper support protrusion 425 and the lower support protrusion 426 is ensured. It is good also as improving.

  Further, an operation detection sensor 427 as an operation detection unit including a light projecting unit 427 a and a light receiving unit 427 b provided at a position opposite to the light projecting unit 427 a is provided at the lower part of the inner peripheral surface of the main body 405. ing. 37, when the operation unit 406 is pushed down against the biasing force of the coil spring 424, the colored lower component 412 of the operation unit 406 emits light from the light projecting unit 427a. Light from the ridge incident on 427b is blocked. As a result, the operation of the operation unit 406 is detected. When the operation of the operation unit 406 is released (when the hand is released from the operation unit 406), the coil spring 424 is extended by its own elastic force, and the operation unit 406 is displaced in a direction (upward) protruding from the main body 405. Thus, the original state (a state in which the light of the light projecting unit 427a is not blocked by the operation unit 406) is restored. In this embodiment, the position of the operation unit 406 in the state where the light of the light projecting unit 427a is blocked by the operation unit 406 corresponds to the operation position, and the position of the operation unit 406 in the state where it is not blocked is the non-operation position. Equivalent to. Further, the operation detection means can be constituted by other sensors and switches.

  Further, on the bottom surface of the main body 405, when the operation unit 406 is pushed down to the maximum against the urging force of the coil spring 424, the rubber unit abuts against the lower side of the operation unit 406 (lower component 412). A buffer material 428 is provided. In the present embodiment, the upper support protrusion 425 and the lower support protrusion 426 that support the coil spring 424 are configured not to contact each other even when the operation unit 406 is pressed down to the maximum (in the vertical direction, The length (height) of the base cylinder 421 of the lower component 412 is longer than the length obtained by adding the support protrusion 425 and the lower support protrusion 426.

  Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the main body 405 is configured to be relatively displaceable up and down with respect to the housing 404, and thus the upper plate 19, so that the operation unit 406 is not operated. Even if it exists, the protrusion length of the operation part 406 which protrudes above the attachment base 403 via the attachment hole 401 of the top plate 19 and the insertion opening part 402 of the attachment base 403 is not constant, and it responded to each situation. It changes with the displacement of the main body 405. As shown in FIG. 36, the main body 405 of the present embodiment has a reference position at which the operation unit 406 protrudes a predetermined length from the upper surface of the mounting base 403 (exposed surface that exposes the operation unit 406 to the outside), and FIG. 39, a protruding position that protrudes above the reference position, and an operating portion that is positioned below the reference position as shown in FIG. 39, even though the player does not operate the operating portion 406. 406 (operation surface) is configured to be displaced between an immersion position (accommodated state) where the operation surface is immersed below the mounting base 403.

  Further, a seal lip 429 made of rubber or thermoplastic resin (for example, EPDM or TPO) extending outward is provided over the entire outer periphery of the base cylinder 421 of the lower component 412. . The tip of the seal lip 429 is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the main body 405, and when the operation unit 406 is relatively displaced up and down, the tip of the seal lip 429 comes into sliding contact with the inner peripheral surface of the main body 405. The seal lip 429 makes it difficult for air to leak from between the operation unit 406 and the main body 405. In addition, an exhaust hole 431 penetrating vertically is formed in the approximate center of the bottom wall of the main body 405. When the operation unit 406 is pressed, the air inside the main body 405 is discharged from the exhaust hole 431 (basically only from the exhaust hole 431) to the outside of the main body 405.

  Further, in the present embodiment, an exhaust passage 432 that guides the air discharged from the exhaust hole 431 to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 is provided. The exhaust passage 432 surrounds the exhaust hole 431 and is connected to the substantially cylindrical connection pipe 433 connected to the lower surface of the main body 405. The exhaust pipe 432 is connected to the connection pipe 433, and follows the vertical displacement of the main body 405. The flexible hose 434 that is deformed, the Y-tube 435 connected to the flexible hose 434, and the air discharged from the main body 405 is connected to one branch of the Y-tube 435 to the back side of the pachinko machine 10. And a second passage 437 that is connected to the other branch of the Y-shaped tube 435 and guides the air discharged from the main body 405 to the handle 18. Further, the first passage 436 and the second passage 437 are provided with a flow rate changing means and a first valve 438 and a second valve 439 as target switching means, and the air flow rate in the first passage 436 and the second passage 437 is adjusted. It is configured to be possible.

  As the first and second valves 438 and 439, shutters capable of closing the first and second passages 436 and 437 are rotatably provided in the first and second passages 436 and 437, and the shutters are rotated. By adjusting the moving angle, the flow rate of air that can pass through the first and second passages 436 and 437 may be adjusted (the opening degree of the first and second valves 438 and 439 is adjusted), A shutter capable of closing the first and second passages 436 and 437 is provided so as to be able to enter and exit into the first and second passages 436 and 437, and the protruding amount of the shutter into the first and second passages 436 and 437 is adjusted. Thus, the flow rate of air that can pass through the first and second passages 436 and 437 may be adjusted (the opening degree of the first and second valves 438 and 439 is adjusted). Further, for example, instead of providing the first and second valves 438 and 439 in the first and second passages 436 and 437 of the Y-shaped pipe 435, a proportional control valve may be provided at the branch point of the Y-shaped pipe 435. Good.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, in the present embodiment, a plurality of small ventilation holes 18 b (blowing ports) are formed on the front side of the handle 18, and the second valve 439 of the second passage 437 is in an open state. When the operation unit 406 of the effect button 125 is operated when the first valve 438 of the first passage 436 is closed, the operation unit 406 is caused by the operation through the exhaust passage 432 and the vent hole 18b. The wind is applied to the hand (palm) holding the handle 18.

  In addition, the first passage 436 is provided with an air pump 440 (blower) that sends air to the effect button 125 via the first passage 436. That is, the second valve 439 is closed and the air pump 440 is driven to increase the pressure inside the main body 405 to change the force required to operate the operation unit 406 or to vibrate the operation unit 406. (Send air intermittently at a rapid pitch). In the present embodiment, the connection pipe 433, the flexible hose 434, the Y-shaped pipe 435, the first passage 436, and the second passage 437 allow the air supply source (the effect button 125 and the air pump 440) and the air outlet (vent hole). 18b) is connected to the communication pipe. The outlet of the first passage 436 (vent hole 18b) and the outlet of the second passage 437 (discharge port) constitute interlocking means.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of motion detection sensors ME1, ME2, ME3, ME4, ME5, ME6, and ME7 are provided on the front side of the front frame set 14 to detect the player's motion. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, along the window 101 of the front frame set 14, the upper center (ME 1), upper right (ME 2), upper left (ME 3), lower right (ME 4) of the window 101. ), The lower left (ME5), the right side of the handle 18 (ME6), and between the upper plate 19 and the lower plate 15 (ME7). Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 4, the game board 30 is also provided with motion detection sensors ME8, ME9, and ME10. In this embodiment, the lower right (ME8), lower left (ME9), and center of the center frame 47 are provided. It is provided in the upper part (ME10). The motion detection sensors ME1 to ME10 include an infrared light projecting unit and a light receiving unit (not shown). When a hand is held in front of the motion detection sensor ME, the infrared light is reflected on the hand or the like and incident on the light receiving unit. As a result, detection is performed. In the present embodiment, these motion detection sensors ME1 to ME10 and the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2 constitute a motion detection unit (the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2 also serves as the proximity detection unit as described above). . Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the motion detection sensors ME1 to ME10 and the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2 are collectively referred to as “motion detection unit 451” (see FIG. 7).

  In addition, the motion detection sensors ME1 to ME10 (and the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2) are all facing forward. Furthermore, each of the motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5, ME8 to ME10, and the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2 is provided with a three-color LED 452 (light emitting means). In this embodiment, the operation detection sensors ME1 to ME5, ME8 to ME10, the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2, and the three-color LED 452 are unitized. Although details will be described later, for example, in a state where the detection of the operation detection sensor 427 (input operation to the operation detection unit 451) is valid, the operation detection sensors ME1 to ME5, ME8 to ME10, and the frame side proximity detection sensor When detection by AE2 is performed, the three-color LED 452 provided side by side is turned on or blinks. Further, the three-color LED 452 of the motion detection unit 451 is not only used for teaching information related to the motion detection unit 451, but can also be used as information suggestion or electrical decoration in other effects.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. A main controller 261 (main board) as main control means is equipped with a CPU 501 as a one-chip microcomputer as an arithmetic unit. The CPU 501 includes a ROM 502 that stores various control programs executed by the CPU 501 and fixed value data, and a RAM 503 that is a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 502 is executed. Various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. However, the CPU, the ROM, and the RAM may not be integrated into one chip but may be configured as a chip for each function.

  The RAM 503 is a stack area that stores the contents of the internal registers of the CPU 501, the return address of a control program executed by the CPU 501, and a work area (work area) that stores various flags, counters, I / O values, and the like. ) And a backup area 503a.

  The RAM 503 is configured to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 313 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and is stored in the stack area, work area, and backup area 503a. All data is backed up.

  In the backup area 503a, when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is turned off when the power is turned on again. (Similarly) is an area for storing stack pointers, values of registers, I / O, and the like. Writing to the backup area 503a is executed when the power is turned off by the main process. Conversely, the return of each value written to the backup area 503a is the main process at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, and so on). Executed in Note that a power failure signal SK1 output from a power failure monitoring circuit 542, which will be described later, is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 501 when a power failure occurs due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Due to the occurrence, the power failure process (NMI interrupt process) is immediately executed.

  Note that if data stored in at least the stack area and the backup area 503a is backed up, it is not always necessary to back up data stored in all areas. For example, the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 503a may be backed up, and the data stored in the work area may not be backed up.

  An input / output port 505 is connected to the CPU 501 incorporating the ROM 502 and RAM 503 via a bus line 504 including an address bus and a data bus. A RAM erase switch circuit 543, a payout control device 311, a sub-control device 262, first and second special display devices 43L and 43R, a normal symbol display device 41, and the like are connected to the input / output port 505. With this configuration, the special display devices 43L and 43R and the normal symbol display device 41 described above are directly controlled by the main control device 261. On the other hand, the decorative symbol display device 42 is controlled via the sub-control device 262.

  For the sake of convenience, illustration of various relay boards and the like is omitted, but the input / output port 505 includes a winning port switch 221, a count switch 223, start winning unit switches 224a and 224b, a through gate switch 225, various switches of the handle 18, and the like. Are connected to various electrical components such as a solenoid for opening and closing the variable winning device 32. That is, the main controller 261 is provided with a plurality of terminal portions (board side connectors) for connecting connectors of various cable connectors, and the input / output port 505 is configured by these terminal portions.

  A sub-control device 262 (sub-control board) as a sub-control means includes a CPU 551 that is an arithmetic device, various control programs executed by the CPU 551, a ROM 552 that stores fixed value data, and a control program that is stored in the ROM 552. RAM 553, which is a memory for temporarily storing various data during execution, input / output port 554, bus line 555, and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit (not shown) It has. The RAM 553 is a memory that temporarily stores work data and flags used when the CPU 551 executes various programs.

  A CPU 551, ROM 552, and RAM 553 are connected to the input / output port 554 via a bus line 555 and a display control device 45 is connected. Further, the speaker SP, the holding lamps 46 a and 46 b, the effect button 125, various lighting units and the lamps 102 to 104 are connected to the input / output port 554.

  The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 causes the display control device 45 to execute display control based on, for example, a command signal (for example, a variation pattern command) transmitted from the main control device 261 and causes the decorative symbol display device 42 to display the display control device. As described above, in the present embodiment, it is displayed that the jackpot is won by the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R controlled by the main control device 261, and the sub control device 262 is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 42 controlled by, display corresponding to the display of the special display devices 43L and 43R (incident effect display) is performed.

  The payout control device 311 controls payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 358. The CPU 511 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 512 that stores a control program executed by the CPU 511, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 513 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 513 of the payout control device 311, like the RAM 503 of the main control device 261, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the CPU 511 and the return address of the control program executed by the CPU 511, various flags and counters, A work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored, and a backup area 513a are provided.

  The RAM 513 is configured to hold (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 313 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and all stored in the stack area, work area, and backup area 513a. Data is backed up. Note that if data stored in at least the stack area and the backup area 513a is backed up, it is not always necessary to back up data stored in all areas. For example, the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 513a may be backed up, and the data stored in the work area may not be backed up.

  The backup area 513a has a stack pointer, each register at the time of power off, each register, so that the power of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is turned off when the power is turned off. This is an area for storing values such as I / O. The writing to the backup area 513a is executed when the power is turned off by the main process, and the restoration of each value written to the backup area 513a is executed in the main process when the power is turned on. As with the CPU 501 of the main controller 261, the power failure signal SK1 is input to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the CPU 511, NMI interrupt processing as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  In the work area, a payout permission flag for which the payout control device 311 is set to allow the payout of prize balls, a command reception flag set when a command transmitted from the main control device 261 is received, and the main control device 261 And a command buffer for storing a command transmitted from.

  The payout permission flag is a flag for setting a prize ball payout permission, and is turned on when a specific command for permitting the payout of the prize ball is transmitted from the main control device 261 and received, and is initially set. It is turned off when it is restored before the process or power shutdown. In the present embodiment, the specific commands are: a payout initialization command for instructing the initial processing of the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311; There are three payout return commands to be transmitted in this case.

  The command reception flag is a flag for confirming whether or not the payout control device 311 has received a command, and is turned on when any command is received. Similar to the payout permission flag, an initial setting process or power-off is performed. It is turned off when returning to the front, and turned off when the command received by the command determination process is determined.

  The command buffer is configured by a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands transmitted from the main control device 261. The ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, and commands are stored with regularity from the beginning to the end of the storage area. When commands are stored in all storage areas, the ring buffer is at the start of the storage area. The return command is configured to be updated. Therefore, when the command is stored and when the command is read, the storage pointer and the read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the command is stored and read based on each pointer.

  An input / output port 515 is connected to the CPU 511 incorporating the ROM 512 and the RAM 513 through a bus line 514 including an address bus and a data bus. A RAM erase switch circuit 543, a main controller 261, a launch controller 312 and a payout device 358 are connected to the input / output port 515, respectively.

  The card unit connection board 314 includes a ball rental operation unit (a ball rental button 121 and a return button 122) on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10, and a card unit (a ball rental unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10 in a game hall or the like. Are electrically connected to each other, and receive a ball lending operation command from the player and output it to the card unit. In a cash machine in which game balls are lent directly to the upper plate 19 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, the card unit connection board 314 can be omitted.

  The launch control device 312 permits or prohibits the launch of the game ball by the launch device 60, and the launch device 60 is permitted to drive when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, a firing permission signal is output from the payout control device 311, a sensor signal is detected that the player is touching the handle 18, and a firing prohibit button 18 a ( 1 is not operated, the launching device 60 is driven, and a game ball is launched with an intensity corresponding to the amount of operation of the handle 18.

  The display control device 45 executes the variable display of the decorative symbols on the decorative symbol display device 42 in accordance with an instruction from the sub-control device 262. The display control device 45 includes a CPU 521, a program ROM 522, a work RAM 523, a video RAM 524, a character ROM 525, a video display processor (VDP) 526, an input port 527, an output port 529, and bus lines 530 and 531. And. An input / output port 554 of the sub control device 262 is connected to the input port 527. Further, a CPU 521, a program ROM 522, a work RAM 523, and a VDP 526 are connected to the input port 527 through a bus line 530. An output port 529 is connected to the VDP 526 via a bus line 531, and a decorative symbol display device 42 as a liquid crystal display device is connected to the output port 529.

  The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 receives the display command transmitted from the sub-control device 262 via the input port 527, analyzes the received command, or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received command to control the VDP 526. (Specifically, generation of an internal command for the VDP 526) is performed. Thereby, display control in the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed.

  The program ROM 522 is a memory that stores various control programs executed by the CPU 521 and fixed value data. The work RAM 523 is a memory that temporarily stores work data and flags used when the CPU 521 executes various programs. It is.

  The video RAM 524 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42, and the display content of the decorative symbol display device 42 is changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 524. The character ROM 525 is a memory that stores character data such as symbols displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42.

  The VDP 526 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an LCD driver (liquid crystal driving circuit) incorporated in the decorative symbol display device 42. Since the VDP 526 is an IC chip, it is also referred to as a “drawing chip”, and the substance of the VDP 526 can be said to be a microcomputer chip with a dedicated firmware for drawing processing. The VDP 526 adjusts the respective timings of the CPU 521, the video RAM 524, etc. to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the display data stored in the video RAM 524 at a predetermined timing and causes the decorative symbol display device 42 to display it.

  The power supply device 313 includes a power supply unit 541 that supplies power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 542 that monitors power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM erase switch circuit 543 connected to the RAM erase switch 323. And.

  The power supply unit 541 supplies necessary operation power to the main control device 261, the payout control device 311 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 541 takes in AC 24 volt power supplied from the outside, generates + 12V power for driving various switches and motors, + 5V power for logic, backup power for RAM backup, etc. These + 12V power supply, + 5V power supply and backup power supply are supplied to the main control device 261, the payout control device 311 and the like. Note that operation power (+12 V power, +5 V power, etc.) is supplied to the launch control device 312 via the payout control device 311. Similarly, operating power is supplied to various switches, motors and the like via a control device to which these are connected.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 542 is a circuit that outputs a power failure signal SK1 to each NMI terminal of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 and the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 542 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 541, and determines that a power failure (power failure) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. The power failure signal SK1 is output to the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311. Based on the output of the power failure signal SK1, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 recognize the occurrence of a power failure and execute a power failure process (NMI interrupt processing).

  The power supply unit 541 normally outputs an output of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the process at the time of a power failure even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Configured to maintain the value. Therefore, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 can normally execute and complete the power failure process.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 543 is a circuit that takes in the switch signal of the RAM erase switch 323 and clears backup data in the RAM 503 of the main controller 261 and the RAM 513 of the payout controller 311 in accordance with the state of the switch 323. When the RAM erase switch 323 is pressed, the RAM erase switch circuit 543 outputs a RAM erase signal SK2 to the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the RAM erase switch 323 pressed (including power-on due to power failure cancellation), the data in the respective RAMs 503 and 513 are cleared in the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311. The

  Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described. In this embodiment, the CPU 501 provided in the main control device 261 as the main control means performs lottery using various counter information in the game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8, a jackpot random number counter C1 used for determining whether or not to generate a jackpot state, a jackpot random number counter C1 used for determining a jackpot type (type lottery), and a decoration The variable selection counter C3 used for determining whether or not the reach state is generated in the symbol display device 42, the initial value random number counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and the first and second special display devices 43L, 43R (decorative symbol display device 42) used for determining the variation display time of the first variation type counter CS1, the second variation type counter CS2, and the normal symbol display device 41 used for lottery (entry assist lottery) The normal symbol random number counter C4 is used. Note that the variation selection counter C3 is also used for reach type lottery when the decorative symbol display device 42 is deviated and varied. The variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are also used for variation pattern selection (effect pattern selection) of the decorative symbol display device 42. Specifically, the variation time of the special display devices 43L and 43R is determined according to the determined variation pattern, and the variation mode and variation time in the decorative symbol display device 42, that is, the effect pattern, are determined.

  Each of the counters C1, C2, C3, CINI, CS1, CS2, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to the lower limit value of 0 after reaching the upper limit value. Each counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 (except for the random number initial value counter CINI).

  The RAM 503 stores a special variable hold area as a hold storage area for storing the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the change selection counter C3, and the normal symbol random number counter C4. A variable holding area is provided. The normal variation holding area includes one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to holding fourth areas). In each holding area of the normal variation holding area, the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 is stored in time series in accordance with the passing history of the game ball to the through gate 34. By adopting this configuration, the variable display on the normal symbol display device 41 can be suspended up to four times.

  The special variable reserved area includes a first special variable reserved area and a second special variable storage area each having four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas), and one execution area. In each holding area of the first special variable holding area, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the fluctuation selection counter C3 are time-sequentially matched to the winning history of the game balls to the top winning opening 33a. Stored in In each holding area of the second special variable holding area, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the fluctuation selection counter C3 are time-sequentially matched to the winning history of the game balls to the lower winning opening 33b. Stored in By adopting this configuration, the variable display on the special display devices 43L and 43R can be suspended up to four times.

  In detail, each jackpot random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 599, for example, and after reaching an upper limit value (ie, 599) as a closing price, 0 is a lower limit value as a starting price. It is the composition which returns to. Normally, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI at that time is read as the next initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The initial value random number counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the big hit random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599), and is updated once for each timer interruption and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of normal processing. On the other hand, the jackpot random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once every timer interruption in this embodiment), and the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the jackpot random number counter buffer. The value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the big win random number counter buffer is stored in the special variation holding area at the timing when the game ball wins the upper winning hole 33a or the lower winning hole 33b of the start winning unit 33. .

  In the present embodiment, the number of values of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is a jackpot in the low probability state (normal mode, time reduction mode) is two, and the value is “7, 307”. In the state (probability change mode, latent probability mode), the number of values of the jackpot random number counter C1 which is a jackpot is 20, and the values are “7 to 16, 307 to 316”. In the present embodiment, two determination tables for determining whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponds to the jackpot are provided in the ROM 502, and “7, 307” is jackpoted. There are a first winning / failing determination table stored as a value and a second winning / failing determination table storing “8 to 16, 308 to 316” as a jackpot value.

  In the normal mode, the probability of winning the jackpot in the winning lottery (the jackpot probability) is 1/300, and the variation time in the normal symbol display device 41 for teaching the result of the entrance assist lottery is 6 seconds. In addition, when winning in the pitch assist lottery, the lower winning opening 33b (opening / closing member 33c) is opened for 0.6 seconds.

  In the probability variation mode, the jackpot probability is 1/30, which is easier to hit than in the normal mode. In the probability variation mode, the variation time of the normal symbol display device 41 based on the entrance assist lottery is 2 seconds, which is shorter than that in the normal mode. Is opened three times and each opening time is 2 seconds. That is, in the probability variation mode, the variation time in the normal symbol display device 41 is shorter than in the normal mode, and the opening time of the bottom winning opening 33b per winning of the winning ball assist lottery is increased and the number of times of opening is large. Become. As a result, the time period during which the lower winning opening 33b is in an open state becomes longer, so that game balls frequently enter the lower winning opening 33b (becomes a high winning state), and the lottery is determined. It will be done continuously and will be in good condition. In the high pitching state, the probability that the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 41 (the winning probability of the pitching assist lottery) may be higher than that in the normal mode.

  In the time reduction mode, the jackpot probability is 1/300. Further, in the time shortening mode, the variation time of the normal symbol display device 41 based on the pitching assist lottery is 2 seconds, and when winning in the pitching assist lottery, the lower winning opening 33b is opened three times, Each opening time is 2 seconds. In other words, the time reduction mode has the same low probability as the jackpot probability in the normal mode, but is the same as the probability variation mode when only the operation of the start winning unit 33 is viewed. In the present embodiment, after the big hit state of “7RN” ends, the time reduction mode is set over a total of 100 variable displays performed on the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R. Further, the time reduction mode ends when a total of 100 variations are displayed on the special display devices 43L and 43R even if no big hit state occurs, and then shifts to the normal mode.

  For example, the type determination counter C2 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 19, for example, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 19), the type determination counter C2 returns to 0 that is the lower limit value. The ROM 502 is provided with a type determination table that is referred to when determining which jackpot type the value of the type determination counter C2 corresponds to. Then, when winning in the winning / losing lottery, the type of the jackpot state type given based on the value of the type determination counter C2 is determined (type lottery is performed), and the jackpot state of the determined type is given The Rukoto.

  The type determination counter C2 is updated periodically (once every timer interruption in this embodiment), and the value of the type determination counter C2 is stored in the type determination counter buffer. Then, the value of the type determination counter C2 stored in the type determination counter buffer is stored in the special variation holding area of the RAM 503 at the timing when the game ball wins the top winning port 33a or the lower winning port 33b of the start winning unit 33. The

  The variation selection counter C3 is configured so that, for example, one by one is added in order within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 238), it returns to the lower limit value of 0. In this embodiment, the reach selection state is generated by the variation selection counter C3, and after the reach state is generated with respect to the decorative symbol, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol and stopped. The final stop symbol after the stop is to draw lots of “reach other than front / rear off” that stops before and after the reach symbol and “complete out” that does not cause reach. In the present embodiment, the ROM 502 is provided with a reach determination table that stores the correspondence between the value of the variation selection counter C3 and the reach type. The reach determination table stores a value of “0 to 238”, C3 = 0, 1 corresponds to the back and forth reach, C3 = 2 to 21 corresponds to the reach other than back and forth, and C3 = 22 to 238 is complete. It has a configuration corresponding to the detachment.

  The fluctuation selection counter C3 is updated periodically (once every timer interruption in this embodiment), and the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 is stored in the fluctuation selection counter buffer. The value of the variation selection counter C3 stored in the variation selection counter buffer is stored in the special variation holding area of the RAM 503 at the timing when the game ball wins the top winning port 33a or the lower winning port 33b of the start winning unit 33. The

  In addition, one of the two variation type counters CS1 and CS2 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 59, for example, and reaches the upper limit value (that is, 59), and then reaches the lower limit value. The other variation type counter CS2 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 37, for example, and reaches the upper limit value (that is, 37), and then returns to the lower limit value of 0. It has become. For example, the first variation type counter CS1 determines the reach pattern of decorative symbols such as so-called normal reach, super reach, premium reach, and other rough symbol variation modes, and the second variation type counter CS2 determines the final stop symbol after the occurrence of reach. A more detailed symbol variation mode is determined, such as an elapsed time until the middle symbol (in this example) stops. Accordingly, a variety of variation patterns can be easily realized by combining these variation type counters CS1 and CS2. It is also possible to determine the symbol variation mode only by the first variation type counter CS1, or to determine the symbol variation mode in combination by combining the first variation type counter CS1 and the stop symbol.

  Further, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated once every time a normal process described later is executed once, and are repeatedly updated even within the remaining time of the normal process. Then, the buffer values of CS1 and CS2 are acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of variation of the decorative symbol by the decorative symbol display device 42.

  In addition, the magnitude | size and range of each counter are only examples, and can be changed arbitrarily. However, it is desirable that the big hit random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, the variation selection counter C3, and the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are all different prime numbers and are not synchronized in any case.

  Further, the normal symbol random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 9, for example, and returns to the upper limit value (that is, after reaching 9 and to the lower limit value of 0). The random number counter C4 is updated periodically (once every timer interruption in this embodiment), and the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 is acquired when the game ball passes through the left or right through gate 34. There are six random number values, and the range is “3 to 8.” When the value of the winning normal symbol random number counter C4 is acquired, the normal symbol display device 41 displays a predetermined variation display. After the time has elapsed, the symbol corresponding to the winning (“◯” in this example) is stopped and displayed, and the lower winning opening 33b (opening / closing member 33c) is opened in a pattern according to the game mode at that time.

  Next, each control process executed by the CPU 501 in the main controller 261 will be described with reference to a flowchart. The processing of the CPU 501 is broadly divided into a main process that is started when the power is turned on, a timer interrupt process that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 2 msec), and a stop signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described first, and then the main process will be described.

  FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. This processing is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 every 2 msec, for example. First, in step S301, various winning switch reading processes are executed. That is, the state of various switches (except for the RAM erase switch 323) connected to the main controller 261 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored. On the other hand, if there is no detection information, the process proceeds to the next process.

  When there is detection information of various winning switches, the value of the corresponding winning ball counter is added. Further, in an external output process of a normal process described later, a prize ball command based on the value of each prize ball counter is output to the payout control device 311 and a prize ball is given based on the prize ball command (a game ball is paid out). ) Further, when the prize ball command is output, the value of each prize ball counter is reset.

  In step S302, random number initial value update processing is executed. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (599 in this example).

  In step S303, random number update processing is executed. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, the variation selection counter C3, and the normal symbol random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1 and their counter values are maximized (in this embodiment, 599, 19 respectively). 238, 9), each is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1, C2, C3, and C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

  Thereafter, in step S304, a start winning process associated with winning the start winning unit 33 is executed. In step S305, a through gate passing process accompanying passing of the game ball to the through gate 34 is executed. Thereafter, the timer interrupt process is temporarily terminated.

  Here, the start winning process in step S304 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In addition, in the execution area of each special variable holding area and each holding area, a success / failure random number storage area that stores the value of the big hit random number counter C1, a winning type random number storage area that stores the value of the type determination counter C2, and a variation selection counter C3 A reach random number storage area for storing values is provided. In the present embodiment, the random number storage area stores the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 using 2 bytes. Each of the winning type random number storage area and the reach random number storage area uses 1 byte to store the value of the type determination counter C2 and the value of the variation selection counter C3. In addition, an upper holding counter Na that counts the number of holdings of the variable display that is triggered by a winning at the top winning port 33a, and a lower holding counter Nb that counts the number of holdings of the variable display that is triggered by a winning at the lower winning port 33b Is provided.

  First, in step S501, it is determined from the detection information of the second start winning switch 224b whether or not the game ball has won the lower winning opening 33b. If an affirmative determination is made in step S501, it is determined in step S502 whether or not the value of the lower hold counter Nb is less than the upper limit value (“4” in the present embodiment). If a negative determination is made in step S501 or S502, the process proceeds to step S509. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S502, the process proceeds to step S503, and the lower hold counter Nb is incremented by one.

  In the subsequent step S504, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the variation selection counter C3 updated by the random number update process in step S303 (the jackpot random number counter buffer, the type determination counter buffer, and the variation selection counter buffer are updated). Each stored value) is stored in a first area (a random number storage area, a winning type random number storage area, a reach random number storage area) among the reserved areas that are free in the special variable reservation area. After step S504, the process proceeds to step S505.

  In step S505, a jackpot determination process is performed to determine whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 newly stored in the special variation holding area is a value corresponding to the jackpot. Details of the jackpot determination process will be described later.

  In the subsequent step S506, when it is determined in step S505 that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot, based on the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special variable holding area, the jackpot A type determination process is performed to determine the type. Details of the type determination process will be described later.

  In the subsequent step S507, if it is determined in step S505 that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is not a value corresponding to the jackpot, the deviation is determined based on the value of the variation selection counter C3 newly stored in the special variation holding area. Reach determination processing for determining the type of reach at the time of change is performed. Details of the reach determination process will be described later.

  Here, the details of the jackpot determination process in step S505 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S5101, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 newly stored in the special variation holding area matches either “7” or “307” that is the value stored in the first win / fail determination table. Is determined. Incidentally, “7” and “307” are values that are big hits in both the low probability state and the high probability state.

  In FIG. 14, for convenience, the process of step S5101 is simplified. However, in practice, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is “7”, and the determination is negative. If it is determined, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is “307”. If an affirmative determination is made in either of these determinations, an affirmative determination is made in step S5101, and which determination is made. If a negative determination is made in step S5101, a negative determination is made in step S5101.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S5101, the process ends after turning on the first success / failure flag in step S5102. In the present embodiment, in addition to the success / failure random number storage area for storing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, a separate success / failure flag is not provided, but information on whether or not a big success state occurs in the success / failure random number storage area. Is stored (overwritten). As described above, the success / failure random number storage area uses 2 bytes. In step S5102, for example, “101010101010101010” is set for the success / failure random number storage area. In the present embodiment, for the sake of convenience, the setting for the success / failure random number storage area is referred to as turning on the first success / failure flag.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5101, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area in step S5103 is the value stored in the second winning / failure determination table “8 to 16, 308”. ˜316 ”or not. Incidentally, “8 to 16, 308 to 316” are values that are jackpots only in the probability variation mode. Note that in the determination process, it is actually determined one by one whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 matches each value corresponding to the jackpot as described above.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S5103, the second success / failure flag is turned on in step S5104, and then the process ends. Note that turning on the second success / failure flag here means that, for example, “1100110011001100” is set in the success / failure random number storage area. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5103, that is, if the result is “out” even in a high probability state, this processing is terminated as it is.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the information related to success / failure is stored using 2 bytes. For example, when noise occurs, the success / failure flag (the content stored in the failure random number storage area) is rewritten. It is possible to prevent a situation in which a big hit state is generated even though it is not a win, or a big win state does not occur even though it is a win. In addition, the pattern (a combination of “1” and “0”) set in the success / failure random number storage area in the big hit determination process is a pattern that is not used when the value of the big hit random number counter C1 is stored in the success / failure random number storage area. is there.

  Next, the type determination process in step S506 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S5201, it is determined whether or not the first or second success / failure flag is set to ON in the jackpot determination process performed immediately before. If a negative determination is made in step S5201 (there is no possibility of a jackpot state), the process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S5201 (there is a possibility that a jackpot state may occur), in step S5202, the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special variation holding area is referred to by referring to the type determination table. It is determined whether or not the value matches a value “0” corresponding to “16RS”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5202, the process ends after the 16RS flag is turned on in step S5203.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the winning type random number storage area for storing the value of the type determination counter C2, a 16RS flag or the like is not separately provided, and “16RS” and “7RS” are not provided in the winning type random number storage area. , “7RN” information is stored (overwritten). As described above, the winning type random number storage area uses 1 byte. In step S5203, for example, “10101010” is set for the winning type random number storage area. In the present embodiment, for convenience, setting a pattern indicating a jackpot type such as “16RS” in the winning type random number storage area is referred to as turning on a flag indicating a jackpot type (such as a 16RS flag). explain.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5202, in step S5204, the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special variation holding area is set to a value “12” corresponding to “7RN” in consideration of the type determination table. To 19 ”is discriminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5204, in step S5205, the 7RN flag is turned on (for example, “00011111” is set for the winning type random number storage area), and then this process ends. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5204, the 7RS flag is turned on in step S5206 (for example, “00010000” is set for the winning type random number storage area), and then this process ends.

  Note that the pattern (the combination of “1” and “0”) set in the winning type random number storage area in the type determining process is not used when the value of the type determination counter C2 is stored in the winning type random number storage area. It is a pattern.

  Next, the reach determination process in step S507 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S5301, it is determined whether or not the first win / fail flag is set in the jackpot determination process performed immediately before. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5301, that is, if the jackpot is large in both the low probability state and the high probability state (a jackpot state always occurs), this processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5301, that is, if a big hit state does not occur at least in a low probability state (there is a possibility of losing), a reach determination table is referred to in step S5302, and a new determination is made. It is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 stored in the special fluctuation holding area coincides with one of the values “0, 1” corresponding to “front / rear out of reach”. If the determination in step S5302 is affirmative, in step S5303, the front / rear flag indicating the occurrence of front / rear out of reach is turned on, and then the process ends.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the reach random number storage area for storing the value of the variation selection counter C3, a separate front / rear flag is not provided, but information indicating that “rear / rear reach” is in the reach random number storage area. Is stored (overwritten). As described above, the reach random number storage area uses 1 byte. In step S5303, for example, “10101010” is set for the reach random number storage area. In the present embodiment, for convenience, the setting for the reach random number storage area will be referred to as turning on the front / rear flag.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5302, the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area in consideration of the reach determination table in step S5304 corresponds to “reach other than forward / backward deviation”. It is determined whether or not the value matches any of the values “2 to 21”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5304, the flag is turned on other than before and after in step S5305, and then the present process ends. Note that turning on the flags other than the front and rear here means that, for example, “11001100” is set in the reach random number storage area.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5304, that is, if the change display ends without complete reach, the process is terminated as it is. The pattern (the combination of “1” and “0”) set in the reach random number storage area in the reach determination process is a pattern that is not used when the value of the variation selection counter C3 is stored in the reach random number storage area. is there.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 13, in step S508 following step S507, a process for setting a starting command is performed. In the advance command, whether the change information stored on hold (predetermined information used to determine the contents of the change display) is triggered by the entry of the top winning opening 33a or the lower winning opening 33b. And information indicating the results of the jackpot determination process, type determination process, and reach determination process are included and output to the sub-control device 262 in the next external output process (see step S201).

  After the process of step S508, or when a negative determination is made in step S501 or step S502, in step S509, whether or not the game ball has won the top winning opening 33a is determined by the first start winning unit switch 224a. It is determined based on detection information. If a negative determination is made in step S509, the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made, in step S510, the value of the upper hold counter Na that counts the number of variable display holds triggered by winning in the upper winning opening 33a is the upper limit (in this embodiment, “4”). ) Is determined. If a negative determination is made in step S510, the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step S510, the process proceeds to step S511, and the upper hold counter Na is incremented by one.

  In the subsequent step S512, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2 and the variation selection counter C3 are stored in a reserved area (a success / failure random number storage area, a winning type random number storage area, a reach random number storage area) in the special variation reservation area. ). After step S512, the process proceeds to step S513.

  In step S513, a jackpot determination process is performed to determine whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 newly stored in the special fluctuation suspension area is a value corresponding to the jackpot. The details of the jackpot determination process have already been described above.

  In the subsequent step S514, if it is determined in step S513 that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot, the jackpot is newly determined based on the value of the type determination counter C2 stored in the special variable holding area. A type determination process for determining the type is performed. Details of the type determination process have already been described above.

  In subsequent step S515, when it is determined in step S513 that the value of the big hit random number counter C1 is not a value corresponding to the big win, the reach is newly determined based on the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 stored in the special fluctuation holding area. Reach determination processing is performed to determine the type. Details of the reach determination process have already been described above.

  After step S515, a starting command setting process is performed in step S516, and this process is terminated. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the top winning port 33a and the lower winning port 33b, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 or the like is directly stored in the special variation holding area, and then the jackpot determination processing and type determination processing are performed. The reach determination process is executed, but is not particularly limited to such a configuration. For example, when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is acquired, a temporary storage area (working area) for temporarily storing these counter values is provided, and for the information stored in the temporary storage area, the jackpot determination process, type After executing the determination process and the reach determination process, a configuration may be adopted in which the information is stored in the corresponding reserved area of the special fluctuation reserved area.

  Next, the through gate passing process in step S305 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In step S601, whether or not the game ball has passed through the through gate 34 is determined based on detection information of the through gate switch 225. If a negative determination is made in step S601, the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S601, that is, if it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through gate 34, the number of suspensions of the variable display performed on the normal symbol display device 41 is counted in step S602. It is determined whether or not the value of the normal hold counter Nc is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). If a negative determination is made here, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S602, that is, if the passing of the game ball to the through gate 34 is confirmed and the value of the normal holding counter Nc <4, the process proceeds to step S603, where the normal holding counter Nc is incremented by one.

  In subsequent step S604, a random number related to the success or failure is acquired. Specifically, the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 updated by the random number update process in step S303 is stored in the first area of the free storage area of the normal variation holding area of the RAM 503. Thereafter, the through gate passing process is terminated.

  FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt process. This process is executed by the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interruption, the state of the main controller 261 at the time of power-off is stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503.

  That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501 in the main controller 261. Then, the CPU 501 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process. In step S401, the CPU 501 stores the power interruption occurrence information in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 as the setting of the power interruption occurrence information, and performs the NMI interruption process. finish.

  The above NMI interrupt processing is executed in the same manner in the payout control device 311, and information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the backup area 513 a of the RAM 513 by the NMI interrupt. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 and the CPU 511 interrupts the control being executed. The NMI interrupt process in FIG. 12 is started. The contents are as described above.

  Next, the flow of main processing executed by the CPU 501 in the main controller 261 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This main process is started upon reset when power is turned on.

  First, in step S101, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed. Specifically, for example, 1 is set in order to set a predetermined value in the stack pointer and wait for the sub-side control device (sub-control device 262, payout control device 311, etc.) to become operable. Wait processing is performed for about 2 seconds. In the subsequent step S102, RAM access is permitted.

  Thereafter, data backup processing is executed for the RAM 503 in the CPU 501. That is, in step S103, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 323 provided in the power supply device 313 is pressed (ON), and if it is pressed, the process proceeds to step S112 to clear (erase) the backup data. To do. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 has not been pressed, it is determined in the subsequent step S104 whether or not occurrence information of power supply interruption is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Here, if it is not set, no backup data is stored, so in this case as well, the process proceeds to step S112. If power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a, a RAM determination value is calculated in step S105, and in the subsequent step S106, whether or not the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off. That is, the effectiveness of the backup is determined. If the RAM determination value calculated here does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in this case, the process also proceeds to step S112.

  In the process of step S112, an initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the sub control device 262, the payout control device 311 and the like. Thereafter, the process proceeds to RAM initialization processing (step S113 and the like). Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. Instead of the RAM determination value, it is possible to determine the effectiveness of backup based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 is correctly stored.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 323 when it is desired to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 323 is ON, the process proceeds to a RAM initialization process (step S113, etc.). Similarly, when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by a RAM determination value (checksum value or the like), the process proceeds to initialization processing of the RAM 503 (step S113 or the like). That is, the use area of the RAM 503 is cleared to 0 in step S113, and the initial value of the RAM 503 is set in subsequent step S114. Thereafter, interrupt permission is set in step S111, and the process proceeds to normal processing described later.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 has not been pressed (step S103: NO), it is a condition that the information on occurrence of power interruption is set and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal. In addition, the process at the time of power recovery (process at the time of power failure recovery) is executed. That is, in step S107, the stack pointer before the power interruption is restored, and in step S108, the information on the occurrence of the power interruption is cleared.

  In step S109, a command for returning the sub-side control device to the gaming state at the time of power-off is transmitted. In step S110, the used register is restored from the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Thereafter, interrupt permission is set in step S111, and the process proceeds to normal processing described later.

  Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In this normal process, the main process of the game is executed. As its outline, the processing of steps S201 to S210 is executed as a periodic processing with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps S211 and S212 is executed with the remaining time.

  First, in step S201, a control signal based on the setting contents of the special display devices 43L and 43R and the start winning unit 33 updated in the previous normal processing is transmitted to each device, and output data such as commands is sent to the sub-side. External output processing to be transmitted to each control device is executed.

  For example, when the decorative symbol display device 42 displays the variation of the decorative symbol, a variation pattern command, a symbol command, or the like is transmitted to the sub-control device 262. That is, the variation pattern command and the symbol command are output to the sub-control device 262 in order to cause the decorative symbol display device 42 to perform a display effect in accordance with the display performed on the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R. Command. On the other hand, the sub-control device 262 that has input the variation pattern command, the symbol command, etc. determines the variation mode (variation time, effect mode, etc.) of the decorative symbol display device 42 based on the various commands, and the variation mode. Is indicated to the display control device 45 so as to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 (variable display).

  For convenience, the variation pattern command and the like will be described here. The variation pattern command includes information for specifying the variation type of the decorative symbol such as normal reach, super reach, and premium reach. Note that the fluctuation pattern command and the like are originally 2-byte binary numbers (the same output method as the hold information command), but for convenience, they are expressed in hexadecimal numbers of every 4 bits. In the present embodiment, for example, in the normal mode, any one of “FF10”, “FF11”, “FF12”, “FF13”, “FF14”, “FF15”, and “FF16” is set as the variation pattern command. In the probability changing mode and the time reduction mode, “FD10”, “FD11”, “FD12”, “FD13”, “FD14”, “FD15”, and “FD16” are set. On the other hand, the sub-control device 262 stores the relationship between these variation pattern commands and the variation types of the decorative symbols in a table. Then, the sub-control device 262 determines a variation display effect pattern and the like based on the variation pattern command, and controls the display control device 45 and sound.

  Hereinafter, the variation type of the decorative symbol and the correspondence between the variation type and the variation pattern command will be described.

  Normal reach is a reach pattern that does not display any special effects other than the variation of the decorative design. Then, “FF11” or “FD11” is set in the variation pattern command corresponding to the normal reach according to the mode. In the probability variation mode and the time reduction mode, the variable display time is shortened compared to the normal mode even in various reach cases. For example, the variable display time from which the normal reach is derived is “15 seconds” in the normal mode, and “10 seconds” in the probability variation mode and the time reduction mode.

  Super Reach is a reach pattern in which characters and the like are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 in addition to the decorative symbol during the variation display of the decorative symbol (after the reach state is established), thereby giving the player a sense of expectation. is there. In this embodiment, three types of super reach SR1, SR2, and SR3 are prepared as super reach, and the variable display time is different for each type of super reach. Then, “FF12” or “FD12” is set as the fluctuation pattern command for the super reach SR1, “FF13” or “FD13” is set for the super reach SR2, and “FF14” or “FD14” is set for the super reach SR3. Is set.

  Premium reach is an effect that can be derived only when a big hit state occurs. During the decorative symbol variation display (after reaching the reach state), in addition to the decorative symbol, a character with a different pattern from the super reach is displayed. This is a reach pattern that makes the player have a sense of expectation. Two types of premium reach PR1 and PR2 are prepared for the premium reach of the present embodiment, and the variable display time is different for each type of premium reach. If the premium reach PR1, then “FF15” or “FD15” is set as the variation pattern command. If it is premium reach PR2, “FF16” or “FD16” is set.

  In addition, “FF10” or “FD10” is set as the variation pattern command corresponding to the mode for the variation pattern command corresponding to “completely out” that does not reach any reach state. In the present embodiment, the fluctuation display time that is completely off is set to “10 seconds” in the normal mode, and “6 seconds” in the probability variation mode and the time reduction mode.

  Further, the sub-control device 262 determines a stop symbol (combination of stop symbols) based on the symbol command, and displays it after the fluctuation time has elapsed. The symbol command is a command that causes the sub-control device 262 to determine a stop symbol, a combination of probability variation jackpot symbol, a combination of normal jackpot symbol, a combination of front / rear off symbol, a combination of symbols other than front / rear off symbol, a completely out symbol The five categories of combinations are designated. These divisions are indicated by, for example, “AA11”, “AA12”, “AA13”, “AA14”, “AA15”, and any of these is set as a symbol command. On the other hand, the sub-control device 262 stores the relationship between these commands and stop symbols in a table. Then, the sub-control device 262 stops displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the symbol command.

  Hereinafter, the stop symbol classification and the correspondence between the stop symbol and the symbol command will be described. The probable jackpot symbol combination is a symbol combination made up of odd numbers 1, 3, 5, 7, or 9. Moreover, the combination of the normal jackpot symbol is a symbol combination composed of an even number of 2, 4, 6, or 8 in the form of an even number. In this embodiment, in the case of probability variation jackpot (“16RS” or “7RS”), the variable display is stopped and displayed in combination with either probability variation jackpot symbol or normal jackpot symbol, and in case of normal jackpot (“7RN”) Usually, the variable display is stopped and displayed by the combination of the jackpot symbol.

  Then, “AA11” is set to the symbol command in the case of the probable big hit, and “AA12” is set to the symbol command in the case of the normal big hit. Then, when “AA11” is set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 determines one of the symbol combinations consisting of any one of the first to ninth symbols as a stop symbol, and “AA12” "Is set, one of the combinations of symbols of any of 2, 4, 6 and 8 is determined as a stop symbol.

  The combination of back and forth symbols corresponds to the combination of back and forth symbols, where after reaching, the final stop symbol is stopped by one shift before and after the reach symbol. “AA13” is set in the symbol command. The combination of symbols other than front / rear detachment corresponds to the “reach other than front / rear detachment” that occurs after reach occurs, and the final stop symbol stops other than before / after the reach symbol. “AA14” is set in the command. The combination of completely out symbols corresponds to “complete out” which does not even reach, and “AA15” is set in the symbol command corresponding to the combination of complete out symbols. In the present embodiment, when the decorative symbol display device 42 stops and displays a combination of symbols that are out of front and back, a combination of symbols other than front and back, and a combination of completely out symbols.

  As will be described in detail later, when “AA13” to “AA15” are set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 stops the combination of symbols stored in the counter buffer of the corresponding RAM 553. Determine as. In the present embodiment, three commands “AA13” to “AA15” are prepared as the symbol commands for removal. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, there is only one symbol command for removal, The sub-control device 262 may determine the combination of decorative symbols.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 10, in step S202, update of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 is executed. More specifically, as with the other counters, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1, and are cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the upper limit values (59 and 37 in this embodiment), respectively. To do. Then, the update values of the variation type counters CS 1 and CS 2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

  In the subsequent step S203, the prize ball counting signal received from the payout control device 311 is read. Next, in step S204, the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 311 is read.

  Thereafter, in step S205, a first display control process is executed. In this process, control related to the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R is performed, and determination of jackpot and setting of variable display in the special display devices 43L and 43R and the decorative symbol display device 42 are performed. Details of the first display control process will be described later.

  In step S206, variable winning device control processing is executed. In this process, control related to the variable winning device 32 is performed. As a result, when the big win state is reached, the opening / closing process of the variable winning device 32 (big winning opening) is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. Details of the variable winning device control process will be described later.

  In step S207, the second display control process is executed. In this process, control related to the normal symbol display device 41 is performed. Details of the second display control process will be described later.

  In step S208, an opportunity handling unit control process is executed. In this process, control related to the start winning unit 33 is performed. Details of the opportunity handling unit control processing will be described later.

  After that, in step S209, it is determined whether or not occurrence information of power interruption is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Here, if the occurrence information of the power interruption is not set in the backup area 503a, it is determined in step S210 whether or not the next normal processing execution timing has been reached, that is, a predetermined time (4 msec in this example) from the start of the previous normal processing. ) Or not. And if predetermined time has already passed, it will transfer to Step S201 and will repeat the processing after the above-mentioned Step S201.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the previous normal process, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process. Repeatedly execute (step S211 and step S212).

  That is, in step S211, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (599 in this example).

  In step S212, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated (similar to step S202). Specifically, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1, and are cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum values (59 and 37 in this example). Then, the change values of the variation type counters CS 1 and CS 2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

  Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S201 to S209 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next execution timing of the normal process is not constant and varies. Therefore, it is possible to update the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the big hit random number counter C1) at random by repeatedly executing the update of the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, and similarly change The type counters CS1 and CS2 can also be updated at random.

  If the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 (step S209: YES), the power supply is cut off. Therefore, the process after step S213 is performed as a power failure process at the time of the power supply interruption. Is called. In the power failure process, first, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited in step S213, the contents of each register used by the CPU 501 are saved in the stack area in step S214, and the value of the stack pointer is saved in the backup area 503a in step S215. To remember.

  Thereafter, in step S216, a power-off notification command indicating that the power has been cut off is transmitted to other control devices (such as the payout control device 311). In step S217, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored in the backup area 503a. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. Thereafter, RAM access is prohibited in step S218, and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and processing cannot be executed.

  The process in step S209 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the game state change performed in steps S201 to S208, or at the end of one cycle of the processes in steps S211 and S212 performed within the remaining time. It is executed at the timing. Therefore, in the normal process of the main controller 261, the occurrence information of the power interruption is confirmed at the end of each process, so that the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 is less than that in the middle of each process. And can be easily memorized. Further, when returning to the state before power-off, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a is small, it can be easily restored and the processing load of the main control device 261 can be reduced. . Further, since the interruption processing is prohibited before the data is stored (step S213), it is possible to prevent the data from being changed when the power is shut off and to reliably store the state before the power is shut off. .

  Next, the first display control process of step S205 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. First, in step S801, the jackpot status storage area, which will be described later, is referred to in detail, and it is determined whether or not the current status is other than the jackpot status. During the jackpot state, an opening period from when the display mode corresponding to the jackpot is stopped and displayed on the specific display devices 43L and 43R until the variable winning device 32 is opened, and the variable winning device 32 is in the open state. Round period, an interval period in which the variable winning device 32 is closed, and an ending period until the variable display of the special display devices 43L and 43R can be started after the final round. In the jackpot status storage area of this embodiment, “0” is stored in a state other than the jackpot state. In the jackpot state, “1” is stored during the opening period and the interval period, and “2” is stored during the round period. “3” is stored during the ending period. That is, in step S801, it is determined whether or not “0” is stored in the jackpot status storage area.

  Note that it is for convenience that numbers such as “0” to “3” are stored in the jackpot status storage area. Actually, the jackpot status storage area uses 2 bytes. However, the fact that “1010101010101010” or the like is set in the jackpot status storage area will be described as “0” or the like being stored.

  If a negative determination is made in step S801, that is, if the jackpot state is in effect, the processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S801, in step S802, a first display described in detail later is made. By looking at the setting state of the middle flag, it is determined whether or not the first or second special display device 43L, 43R (decorative symbol display device 42) is in a variable display. Specifically, when the first display flag is in the on state, it is considered that the variable display is being performed, and when the first display flag is in the off state, it is considered that the variable display is being stopped. . As will be described in detail later, the first display flag is turned on when the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R start to display the change, and the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R are turned on. Turned off when the variable display is stopped.

  If a negative determination is made in step S802, that is, if there is no big win and further fluctuation display is not being performed, the process proceeds to step S803, and the fluctuation display (second fluctuation display) triggered by entering the lower prize opening 33b. It is determined whether or not the value of the lower hold counter Nb that counts the number of holds is greater than zero.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S803, that is, if at least one second variation display is held, 1 is subtracted from the lower hold counter Nb in step S804. In the present embodiment, when the second variation display is suspended and stored by the determination processing in step S803, the second variation display is executed without executing the first variation display. In other words, even when the first variation display is stored on hold earlier than the second variation display, the second variation display is preferentially digested (the first variation display is postponed). ing.

  In a succeeding step S805, a process for shifting the data stored in the second special variation holding area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the holding first to fourth areas of the second special variable holding area to the execution area side. The holding first area → the execution area, the holding second Data in each area is shifted, such as area → holding first area, holding third area → holding second area, holding fourth area → holding third area. After step S805, in step S806, a process for causing the variation specifying lamp 40 to emit red light is performed. Thereafter, in step S807, a variable display setting process, which will be described in detail later, is performed, and then this process is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S803, that is, if no second variation display is stored on hold, a variation display (first display) triggered by entering the top winning opening 33a in step S808. It is determined whether or not an upper hold counter Na for counting the number of hold (variable display) is greater than zero. If a negative determination is made in step S808, the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S808, 1 is subtracted from the upper hold counter Na in step S809. In a succeeding step S810, a process for shifting the data stored in the first special variation holding area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the holding first to fourth areas of the first special variable holding area to the execution area side. The holding first area → the execution area, the holding second Data in each area is shifted, such as area → holding first area, holding third area → holding second area, holding fourth area → holding third area. After step S810, in step S811, a process for causing the variation specifying lamp 40 to emit blue light is performed. Then, after performing the variable display setting process in step S807, this process is terminated. In the present embodiment, the execution area of the special variable reservation area is one, and the data stored in the first special variable reservation area and the second special variable reservation area are displayed when the variable display based on the data is performed. Therefore, it is shifted to a common execution area.

  Here, details of the variable display setting process in step S807 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S901, a mode storage area, which will be described later, is referred to in detail to determine whether or not a high probability state (probability variation mode). In the mode storage area, discrimination information for discriminating the game mode is stored. In this embodiment, the mode storage area stores any one of “11”, “12”, and “21”, “11” corresponds to the normal mode, and “12” represents the time reduction mode. “21” corresponds to the probability variation mode. That is, in step S901, it is determined whether or not a high probability state is obtained by determining whether or not “21” is stored in the mode storage area.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S901, that is, in the case of a high probability state, in step S902, the first or second success / failure flag (see FIG. 14 is determined whether or not one of them is set to ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step S902, that is, if it is determined that a big win is won in the high-probability state, the process proceeds to step S904.

  If a negative determination is made in step S901, that is, if the low probability state (normal mode, time reduction mode) is set, in step S903, whether or not the first success / failure flag is turned on in consideration of the success / failure random number storage area. Determine whether or not. If an affirmative determination is made in step S903, that is, if it is determined that a big win is won in the winning lottery in a low probability state, the process proceeds to step S904.

  In step S904, it is determined whether or not the 16RS flag (see type determination processing in FIG. 15) is set to ON by referring to the winning type random number storage area of the execution area of the special variable suspension area. If an affirmative determination is made in step S904, ie, “16RS”, a 16RS pattern setting process (a process for setting a variation pattern command and a symbol command) is performed in step S905. The 16RS pattern setting process is a process for executing fluctuation display for teaching the occurrence of “16RS”, and is based on the values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 503. The variation patterns (variation display time, effect pattern, etc.) of the display devices 43L and 43R and the decorative symbol display device 42 are determined, and the variation pattern command and the symbol command are set based on the determination and various flags. The relationship between the numerical value of the first variation type counter CS1 and the reach pattern and the relationship between the numerical value of the second variation type counter CS2 and the variation time are defined in advance by a table or the like. After step S905, the process proceeds to step S914 described later.

  If a negative determination is made in step S904, it is determined in step S906 whether or not the 7RS flag is set on with reference to the winning type random number storage area of the execution area of the special variable holding area. If an affirmative determination is made in step S906, that is, if “7RS”, 7RS pattern setting processing is performed in step S907. After step S907, the process proceeds to step S914.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S906, that is, if “7RN”, the 7RN pattern setting process is performed in step S908. After step S908, the process proceeds to step S914.

  Also, if a negative determination is made in step S902 or step S903, that is, if it is determined that it is not a big hit, in step S909, the reach random number storage area of the execution area of the special variable holding area is taken into consideration, and the front and rear flags (FIG. It is determined whether or not (see 16 reach determination processing) is ON. If the determination in step S909 is affirmative, that is, if “rearward / rearward reach”, the front / rear reach pattern setting process is performed in step S910, and then the process proceeds to step S914.

  If a negative determination is made in step S909, in step S911, the reach random number storage area of the execution area of the special variable holding area is taken into consideration, and it is determined whether or not the other flags are on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S911, that is, if “reach other than front / rear out”, a reach pattern setting process other than front / rear is performed in step S912, and then the process proceeds to step S914.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S911, that is, if it is “completely out”, a deviation variation pattern setting process is performed in step S913, and then the process proceeds to step S914.

  In step S914, a start setting process is performed to indicate that a condition for performing switching display (variation display) is satisfied in the special display devices 43L and 43R. In the start setting process, the first display flag indicating whether or not the variable display is being performed on the special display devices 43L and 43R is turned on, and the first display timer setting process is performed.

  The first display timer is a means for measuring the variation time (residual time for variation display) in the special display devices 43L and 43R, and is considered when determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed since the beginning of the variation display. . In addition, the value corresponding to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 is set as the variation display time of the special display devices 43L and 43R in the present embodiment. Based on the setting of the first display timer, when a control signal for starting the switching display (variation display) is output to the special display devices 43L and 43R in the next external output process of the normal process. In the special display devices 43L and 43R, switching display (variation display) is started. The sub-control device 262 that has received the variation pattern command and the symbol command starts variation display in the decorative symbol display device 42 based on the variation pattern command simultaneously with the start of variation of the special display devices 43L and 43R. Simultaneously with the stop display of 43L and 43R, the variable display on the decorative symbol display device 42 is stopped and displayed by a combination of symbols based on the symbol command. After step S914 ends, the variable display setting process ends.

  In the present embodiment, the process of acquiring the value of the big hit random number counter C1 in steps S504 and S512 of the start winning process and storing it in the special fluctuation holding area, the jackpot determination process in steps S505 and 513, and the fluctuation display setting process The winning / losing lottery is configured by the processing of steps S901 to S903 in which various jackpot flags are set based on the winning / losing flag.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 18, if an affirmative determination is made in step S <b> 802, that is, if the variable display is being performed, the process proceeds to step S <b> 812, and the first display timer is subtracted. Each time this process is performed, the value of the first display timer is subtracted by 4 msec. For example, when the fluctuation time is 10 seconds (10000 msec), “2500” is set for the first display timer, and 1 is subtracted every 4 msec.

  Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S813, and it is determined whether or not a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed with reference to the value of the first display timer after the subtraction. At this time, when a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the first display timer becomes “0”, an affirmative determination is made in step S813.

  When a negative determination is made in step S813, in step S817, a switching display setting for continuously performing switching display (variable display) of the special display devices 43L and 43R is performed, and this process is terminated. Based on the setting contents of the switching display setting, a control signal for switching display is output to the special display devices 43L and 43R in the external output processing in the next normal processing. Thereby, the switching display (variable display) of the special display devices 43L and 43R is realized at the timing of the first display control process, that is, every 4 ms.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S813, the first display flag is turned off in step S814, and stop display setting for performing stop display in the special display devices 43L and 43R is performed in step S815. Based on the setting contents of the stop display setting, a control signal for performing stop display is output to the special display devices 43L and 42R in the external output process in the next normal process. That is, stop display is performed in a stop mode corresponding to each jackpot type or loss. In addition, a control signal to stop display of the decorative symbol display device 42 is also output to the sub-control device 262. Thereby, the synchronization of the stop timings of the special display devices 43L and 42R and the decorative symbol display device 42 is ensured. However, since the stop mode of the decorative symbol display device 42 has already been determined by the sub-control device 262 based on the symbol command or the variation pattern command output at the start of the variable display, information regarding the stop mode of the decorative symbol display device 42 is again obtained. There is no need to add. Again, the display is mainly the stop display by the special display devices 43L and 43R, and the display of the decorative symbols by the decorative symbol display device 42 is only auxiliary (for production). Yes.

  Subsequently, after the discrimination information setting process is performed in step S816, the present process is terminated. Here, the discrimination information setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag (16RS flag, 7RS flag, 7RN flag) indicating the occurrence of the jackpot state is set on by taking into account the random number storage area of the execution area of the special variable suspension area. To do. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1001, the process proceeds to a process for performing the initial setting of the jackpot state in step S1002 and subsequent steps. That is, in step S1002, it is determined whether or not the 16RS flag is set to ON by taking into consideration the validity random number storage area of the execution area of the special variable suspension area.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1002, “16” is set in a round number counter for determining the number of rounds executed during the jackpot state (the number of times the variable winning device 32 is opened) in step S1003. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1002, “7” is set in the round number counter in step S1004. After step S1003 or step S1004, the process proceeds to step S1005.

  In step S1005, “1” is set for the jackpot status storage area. In the subsequent step S1006, for example, a value “2000” corresponding to an opening period of 8 seconds is set for the first variable timer used for the control in the big hit state (opening / closing control of the variable winning device 32). Subsequently, in step S1007, “8” indicating the maximum number of balls entered per round is set to “8” for the winning counter for counting the number of game balls that have entered the variable winning device 32. . The value of the winning counter is determined based on the detection information of the count switch 223 to determine whether or not there is a ball entering the variable winning device 32 in the switch reading process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 11). When it is determined that there has been an incoming ball, 1 is subtracted.

  Then, in step S1008, an opening command for notifying the sub-control device 262 of the start of the jackpot state is set. The opening command includes jackpot type information and the like, and the sub-control device 262 can grasp the total number of rounds in the jackpot state. After step S1008, this process ends.

  In addition, in the jackpot state, the promotion effect of the appearance of the jackpot type, etc. (for example, when the even-numbered slotted eyes are stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42, “7RS” or “16RS” is won in the jackpot state immediately after Or instructing that “16RS” has been won in the jackpot state immediately after the odd symbol is stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42). .

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1001, that is, if it is determined as “out”, the process proceeds to step S1009. In step S1009, it is determined whether or not the value set in the mode storage area is “12” indicating that it is the time reduction mode, that is, whether or not it is the time reduction mode. If a negative determination is made in step S1009, the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1009, in step S1010, 1 is subtracted from the value of the variation counter in order to measure the duration of the time reduction mode. As will be described later, in this embodiment, “100” is set in the variation counter at the end of the big hit state of “7RN”, and the variation display of the special display devices 43L and 43R (decorated symbol display device 42) is performed once. Every time it is read, 1 is subtracted in step S1010.

  In a succeeding step S1011, it is determined whether or not the value of the variation counter is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S1011, that is, if the variable display has not been performed 100 times in the special display devices 43L and 43R (decorated symbol display device 42) after the time reduction mode is started, the present processing is continued. Exit.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1011, "11" indicating the normal mode is set in the mode storage area in step S1012. That is, when the variable display is performed 100 times on the special display devices 43L and 43R, the time reduction mode ends and the mode is shifted to the normal mode. After this step S1012, this process ends.

  Next, the variable winning device control process in step S206 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1201, it is determined whether or not the value set in the jackpot status storage area is “0”, thereby determining whether or not the status is a status other than the jackpot status. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1201, that is, if the jackpot state is not reached, this processing is terminated as it is. Incidentally, at the start of the jackpot state, “1” is set in the jackpot status storage area in the discrimination information setting process.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1201, that is, if the jackpot state is in effect (if any of “1” to “3” is set in the jackpot status storage area), the process proceeds to step S1202. Subtract 1 from the value of the first variable timer. Incidentally, at the start of the big hit state, “2000” is set in the first variable timer in the discrimination information setting process.

  In a succeeding step S1203, it is determined whether or not the value of the first variable timer is “0”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1203, it is determined in step S1204 whether or not “1” is set in the jackpot status storage area.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1204, “2” is set for the jackpot status storage area in step S1205. In step S1206, a value “7500” corresponding to the time (30 seconds) for maintaining the variable winning device 32 in the open state is set for the first variable timer.

  After step S1206, in step S1207, the variable winning device 32 is opened, and in step S1208, a round command is set to inform the sub-control device 262 that the round is to be started. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1204, it is determined in step S1209 whether or not “3” is set in the jackpot status storage area. As will be described in detail later, when all rounds in the jackpot state are completed and the ending period starts, “3” is set for the jackpot status storage area. If a negative determination is made in step S1209, that is, if it is not yet time to end the jackpot state, 1 is subtracted from the value of the round number counter in step S1210.

  In a succeeding step S1211, it is determined whether or not the value of the round number counter is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S1211, that is, if there is still a round to be executed, the process proceeds to step S1212 and "1" is set for the jackpot status storage area. Thereafter, in step S1213, a value “1000” corresponding to the interval time (4 seconds) is set for the first variable timer, and in step S1214, “8” is set for the winning counter. Further, in step S1215, the variable winning device 32 is closed, and in step S1216, an interval command for informing the sub-control device 262 that the interval is to be started is set. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1203, that is, if there remains a time (open time or close time) in which the variable winning device 32 should be kept open or closed, the process proceeds to step S1217, and the variable winning device 32 is variable. It is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter for measuring the number of balls entered into the winning device 32 is “0”. The winning counter is set to “8”, which is the upper limit (specified number) of winnings per round at the start of the big hit state and the start of the interval. Each time one game ball enters the variable winning device 32, 1 is subtracted.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1217, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1217, that is, if the end of the round comes without waiting for the set period of the round to pass, the process proceeds to step S1210. As a result, if eight game balls have entered the variable winning device 32 during one round, the round will end immediately at that point even if the opening period of 30 seconds has not elapsed. Become.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1211, that is, if all rounds in the jackpot state are exhausted, the process moves to step S1218, and "3" is set for the jackpot status storage area. After step S1218, in step S1219, a value “2500” corresponding to the ending time (10 seconds) is set for the first variable timer.

  In subsequent step S1220, "7" is set to the winning counter. Note that when the process of setting the ending after step S1218 is performed in the flow after the positive determination is made in step S1217, the value of the winning counter is “0”. If the value of the winning counter is set to “0” as it is at the start of the ending period, an affirmative determination is made in step S1217 in the variable winning device control process after 4 msec, and the ending period cannot be completed. For this reason, a tentative numerical value other than “0” (“7” in this example) is entered in the winning counter in step S1220 to complete the ending period. Of course, the ending period may be completed by another method.

  After step S1220, in step S1221, a process for closing the variable prize-winning device 32 is performed. In subsequent step S1222, an ending command for informing the sub-control device 262 of information to start ending is set. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  If the determination in step S1209 is affirmative, that is, if it is time to end the jackpot state after the ending period ends, the process proceeds to step S1223 to perform end setting processing. In the end setting process, a mode storage area and a variation counter are set.

  Here, the end setting process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not the 7RN flag is set on in the winning type random number storage area of the execution area of the special variable suspension area. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1401, a value “12” corresponding to the time reduction mode is set in the mode storage area in step S1402. As a result, the time reduction mode is given after the end of the big hit state.

  In the subsequent step S1403, “100” is set to the variation counter. The variation counter is a means for measuring the duration of the time reduction mode (how many variations are displayed) as described above. In the mode storage area setting process, “12” is set in the mode storage area. Is set, “100” corresponding to 100 fluctuation displays is set as the value of the fluctuation counter. After step S1403, this process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1401, that is, if “16RS” or “7RS” is stored in the winning type random number storage area of the execution area of the special variable hold area, in step S1404, the mode storage area Is set to a value “21” corresponding to the probability variation mode. As a result, the probability variation mode is given after the end of the big hit state. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 21, after step S1223, in step S1224, “0” indicating that the jackpot status storage area is not in the jackpot state is set. Thereafter, in step S1225, after setting a jackpot end command for informing the sub-control device 262 that the jackpot state is to be ended, this processing is terminated. The jackpot end command includes the game mode set in the end setting process, the number information of the variation counter, and the like.

  Next, the second display control process of step S207 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  23, in step S2101, the normal symbol display device 41 determines whether or not the second display flag indicating whether or not the variable display is being displayed is on, thereby switching the normal symbol display device 41. It is determined whether or not display (variation display) is in progress. When the second display flag is on, it is considered that the normal symbol display device 41 is in a variable display, and when the second display flag is off, the normal symbol display device 41 stops the variable display. It is considered that the stop display corresponding to the state is in progress.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2101, the process proceeds to step S2102, and it is determined whether or not the value of the normal hold counter Nc is greater than zero. At this time, if the value of the normal hold counter Nc is 0, this processing is terminated as it is.

  If the variable display is not being performed and the value of the normal hold counter Nc> 0, the process proceeds to step S2103. In step S2103, 1 is subtracted from the normal hold counter Nc. In step S2104, a process for shifting the data stored in the normal variation holding area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the holding first to fourth areas of the normally variable holding area to the execution area side. The holding first area → the execution area, the holding second area → The data in each area is shifted such as the first hold area, the third hold area → the second hold area, the fourth hold area → the third hold area.

  Thereafter, in step S2105, start setting processing is executed. In this process, the normal symbol display device 41 performs a process indicating that a condition for performing switching display (variable display) is established. Specifically, the second display timer flag is turned on, and the second display timer setting process is performed. The second display timer is a means for measuring the fluctuation time (residual time) of the fluctuation display performed by the normal symbol display device 41, and is used when determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation display. Is done. In the present embodiment, in the normal mode, since the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed by the normal symbol display device 41 is 6 seconds, “1500” is set in the second display timer. In the probability variation mode and the time reduction mode, since the variation time of the normal symbol display device 41 is 2 seconds, “500” is set in the second display timer. Based on the setting in the start setting process, when a control signal for starting the switching display (variation display) is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the next external output process of the normal process, the normal symbol display is performed. Switching display is started in the device 41. As described above, the normal symbol display device 41 is configured to light up and display “O” or “X” as an ordinary symbol. If the displayed symbol is “O”, “X”, “X” "Is switched to" ○ ". Then, after step S2105 ends, the second display control process ends.

  If the determination in step S2101 is affirmative, that is, if the normal symbol display device 41 is performing variable display, the process proceeds to step S2106 to perform a second display timer subtraction process. Each time this process is performed, the count value of the second display timer is decremented by one.

  In step S2107, it is determined whether or not the count value of the second display timer is “0”, that is, whether or not the variation time has elapsed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2107, the second display flag is turned off in step S2108, and normal symbol stop display setting for performing stop display on the normal symbol display device 41 is performed in step S2109. Then, based on the setting contents of the normal symbol stop display setting, a control signal to stop display is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the next external output processing in the normal processing. That is, in the case of winning, the “◯” symbol (winning symbol) is stopped (for example, lit only for a few seconds), and in the case of being off, the “x” symbol is stopped.

  As described above, it is determined whether or not the winning is made based on the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal variation holding area. Specifically, “3-8” is the winning value among the numerical values 0-9 of the normal symbol random number counter C4.

  Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S2110, a normal symbol discrimination information setting process is performed, and this process ends. In this process, when the stop display corresponds to winning, a setting process for performing the opening / closing process of the start winning unit 33 is performed. Specifically, the ball entry assist flag is set to ON, the second variable flag is set to ON, the opening time is set to the second variable timer, and the start winning unit 33 (opening / closing member 33c) is driven to the driving number counter. Set (Number of times to open).

  The entry assist flag is discrimination information for discriminating whether or not a process based on winning of the entrance assist lottery is being performed. The second variable flag is determination information for determining whether or not the start winning unit 33 (opening / closing member 33c) is in an open state. The second variable timer is a means for measuring the opening time (remaining time) of the start winning unit 33, and is considered when determining whether or not a specified time has elapsed since the opening start. The driving number counter is a means for measuring the number of times (the remaining number of times) the opening / closing member 33c is opened.

  Various control signals are output to the start winning unit 33 in the next external output process of the normal process based on the ON / OFF state of the second variable flag. When the second variable flag is on, a control signal for opening the opening / closing member 33c is output to the start winning unit 33, and the start winning unit 33 is opened. On the other hand, when the second variable flag is OFF, a control signal for closing the opening / closing member 33c is output to the start winning unit 33, and the starting winning unit 33 is closed (the opening / closing member 33c is closed). , It is impossible to enter the game ball into the lower winning award 33b).

  In the present embodiment, the opening time and the number of opening times of the start winning unit 33 are different between the high pitching state (probability change mode and time reduction mode) and the low pitching state (normal mode). In the present embodiment, in the high pitching state, “500” is set for the second variable timer, and “3” is set for the drive count counter. On the other hand, in the low entry state, “150” is set for the second variable timer, and “1” is set for the drive counter.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2107, in step S2111 a switching display setting for continuously performing the switching display (variation display) of the normal symbol display device 41 is performed, and this process is terminated. Based on the setting contents of the switching display setting, a control signal for performing switching display is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the external output processing in the next normal processing. Specifically, if the current lighting is “◯”, “×” is displayed, and if “×”, the display is switched to “◯”. Thereby, the switching display (variable display) of the normal symbol display device 41 is realized at the timing of the second display control process, that is, every 4 ms.

  Next, the opportunity handling unit control process in step S208 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  First, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not a ball entry assist flag is on. If a negative determination is made in step S2201, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2201, 1 is subtracted from the value of the second variable timer in step S2202.

  In a succeeding step S2203, it is determined whether or not the second variable flag is ON. If the determination in step S2203 is affirmative, that is, if the start winning unit 33 (opening / closing member 33c) is in the open state, it is determined in step S2204 whether the value of the second variable timer is “0”. To do. If a negative determination is made in step S2204, that is, if the predetermined opening time of the start winning unit 33 has not yet elapsed, the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2204, the process proceeds to step S2205 to turn off the second variable flag. In the subsequent step S2206, 1 is subtracted from the value of the drive number counter. Thereafter, in step S2207, it is determined whether or not the value of the drive number counter is “0”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2207, the ball entry assist flag is turned off in step S2208, and then this process ends.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2208, that is, the winning entry assist lottery is performed in the probability variation mode or the time reduction mode, and the start winning unit 33 is released three times based on it. If there is a remaining number of times, a value (for example, “100”) corresponding to the interval time is set for the second variable timer in step S2209. After step S2209, this process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2203, that is, if it is an interval period during which the start winning unit 33 is opened three times (the starting winning unit 33 is in a closed state), the process proceeds to step S2210. It is determined whether or not the value of the variable timer is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S2210, that is, if the interval period has not yet elapsed, the present process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2210, the second variable flag is turned on in step S2211, and a value corresponding to the open time (“500” in this example) is set in the second variable timer in step S2112. Then, this process is terminated.

  Next, payout control executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 will be described. For convenience of explanation, the reception interrupt process will be described first with reference to FIG. 25, and then the main process will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a reception interrupt process executed by the payout control apparatus 311. The reception interrupt process is a process executed by interruption when the payout control device 311 receives a command transmitted from the main control device 261. When the payout control device 311 confirms that the command transmitted from the main control device 261 has been received, the other processing executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 is temporarily waited, and the reception interrupt process is executed. When the reception interrupt process is executed, the command transmitted from the main control device 261 in step S3001 is first stored in the command buffer of the RAM 513, and the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is stored in step S3002. Turns on the command reception flag and ends this reception interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is stored in the command buffer, the storage pointer is referred to and stored in a predetermined storage area, and the storage pointer is stored in order to store the next received command in the next storage area. Is updated.

  In the present embodiment, the reception process of the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is performed by the interrupt process executed when the command is received. For example, as illustrated in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, before the command determination process (step S3201) is performed, it is confirmed whether or not a command is received. If a command is received, the command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 513. The command reception flag may be turned on, and if no command is received, the process may proceed to command determination processing. In such a case, it is confirmed whether or not a command has been received by confirming a port corresponding to the command input of the input / output port at predetermined intervals.

  Next, main processing of the payout control device 311 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the main process of the payout control device 311. This main process is started upon reset when the power is turned on.

  First, in step S3101, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed. Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance is set in the stack pointer, and an interrupt mode is set. In step S3103, the RAM access is permitted, and in step S3104, an external interrupt vector is set.

  Thereafter, in step S3106, it is determined whether or not occurrence information of power interruption is set in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. If the information on occurrence of power interruption is set in the backup area 513a, a RAM determination value is calculated in step S3107, and in step S3108, whether the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off. No, that is, the validity of the backup is determined. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address in the RAM 513. It should be noted that it is possible to determine the effectiveness of backup based on whether or not the keywords written in a predetermined area of the RAM 513 are correctly stored.

  If no power-off occurrence information is set in step S3106, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by a RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) in step S3108, the process proceeds to initialization processing of the RAM 513 after step S3115. Transition.

  In step S3115, the entire area of the RAM 513 is cleared to 0, and in step S3116, the initial value of the RAM 513 is set. Thereafter, in step S3117, the CPU peripheral device is initialized, and the process proceeds to step S3114 to permit interruption.

  On the other hand, on the condition that the power failure occurrence information is set in step S3106 and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal in step S3108, the process at the time of power recovery (at the time of power failure recovery) Process). That is, in step S3109, the stack pointer before power-off is restored, power-off occurrence information is cleared in step S3110, and a payout permission flag that permits payout of prize balls is cleared in step S3111. In step S3112, the CPU peripheral device is initialized. In step S3113, the used register is restored from the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. In step S3114, an interrupt is permitted.

  After the interruption is permitted in step S3114, it is determined in the process of step S3122 whether power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a. Here, if the information on occurrence of power supply interruption is set, the power supply is cut off. Therefore, the processing after step S3123 is performed as a power failure process at the time of power supply interruption. In the power failure process, first, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited in step S3123, and a command determination process described later is executed in the next step S3124. Thereafter, the contents of each register used by the CPU 511 are saved in the stack area in step S3125, the stack pointer value is stored in the backup area 513a in step S3126, and the RAM determination value is calculated in step S3127 to calculate the backup area 513a. In step S3128, RAM access is prohibited, and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 513.

  Note that since the process of step S3122 confirms the occurrence information of the power-off after the process performed at the time of turning on the power, the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513 is smaller than that in the middle of each process. Less and can be easily memorized. Further, when returning to the state before power-off, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a is small, it can be easily restored and the processing load of the payout control device 311 can be reduced. .

  Next, timer interrupt processing of the payout control device 311 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This timer interrupt process is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 2 msec).

  In the timer interrupt process, first, a command from the main control device 261 is acquired, and a determination process for the command is performed (step S3201). This command determination process will be described below with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart illustrating command determination processing performed by the payout control device 311. In the command determination process (steps S3124 and S3201), first, it is determined whether or not the command reception flag is turned on in step S3301. The command reception flag is turned on when a command transmitted from the main controller 261 is received in the above-described reception interrupt process (see FIG. 25).

  If it is determined in step S3301 that the command reception flag is OFF, a new command has not been received from the main control device 261, and thus this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3301 that the command reception flag is on, the received command is read from the RAM 513 in step S3302, and the command reception flag is turned off in step S3303. By turning off the command reception flag in step S3303, the processing in steps S3302 to S3311 can be skipped until a new command is received, so that the control of the payout control device 311 can be reduced.

  The type of command read from the RAM 513 is determined in the processing of step S3304 to step S3306. In step S3304, it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a payout initialization command. In step S3305, it is determined whether or not it is a payout return command. In step S3306, it is determined whether the command is a prize ball command. It is determined whether or not.

  If the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is a payout initialization command, it is determined in step S3307 whether or not the payout permission flag has already been turned on. If the payout permission flag has been turned off, the main power is turned on. Since the initialization of the RAM 513 is instructed from the control device 261, the work area (area) other than the stack area of the RAM 513 is cleared to 0 in step S3308, and the initial value of the RAM 513 is set in step S3309. Thereafter, in step S3311, the payout permission flag is turned on, and the payout permission for the winning ball is set.

  As described above, the main controller 261 performs initialization processing of the RAM 503 after transmitting the payout initialization command, and the payout control device 311 initializes processing of the RAM 513 after receiving the payout initialization command. Therefore, the timing at which the RAM 503 is initialized and the timing at which the RAM 513 is initialized are substantially at the same time. Therefore, even if the payout control device 311 receives a command transmitted from the main control device 261 due to a shift in the initialization timing, the RAM 513 is initialized, and control corresponding to the received command cannot be performed. The occurrence of adverse effects can be prevented. In addition, since the payout permission flag is turned on after the RAM 513 is initialized, it is possible to reliably set the payout allowance for prize balls.

  On the other hand, if the payout permission flag has already been turned on in step S3307, the command determination process is terminated without clearing the work area of the RAM 513 and the initialization process of the RAM 513. That is, the processing in step S3307 prohibits initialization of the RAM 513 with the payout permission flag set. The payout initialization command is a command that is transmitted only when the RAM erase switch 323 is turned on when the power is turned on. Therefore, the payout initialization command is not received in a state where the payout permission flag is turned on. It is conceivable that the payout control device 311 has recognized the payout initialization command due to the influence of noise or the like. Therefore, if the work area of the RAM 513 is cleared (step S3308) and the initial value setting of the RAM 513 (step S3309) is executed in a state where the payout permission flag is turned on, the payout is not made when a prize ball remains. Although an adverse effect occurs and causes a loss to the player, since the RAM 513 is prevented from being initialized while the payout permission flag is turned on, it is possible to prevent the player from being lost.

  Further, if the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a payout return command (step S3304: NO, step S3305: YES), the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power cut-off. In order to permit the payout of the prize ball, the payout permission flag is turned on in step S3311. That is, when there is information on occurrence of power interruption and the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power interruption, the payout of the prize ball is permitted. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step S3311, the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is completed, so the read pointer is changed to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Updated.

  Further, if the command transmitted from main controller 261 is a prize ball command (step S3305: NO, step S3306: YES), the received prize ball number is added to the total prize ball number and stored in step S3310. In order to permit the payout of prize balls, the payout permission flag is turned on in step S3311. At this time, the payout control device 311 sequentially reads out the prize ball commands stored in the command buffer (ring buffer), and adds the number of prize balls corresponding to the command to the total number of prize balls stored in a predetermined buffer area. And remember. Since a prize ball corresponding to the number of prize balls is paid out based on the prize ball command transmitted from the main controller 261, the prize ball command is a payout instruction command for instructing the prize ball to be paid out. . In addition, when a winning ball command is received, the payout permission is immediately set, so that the winning ball can be paid out early for winning. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step S3311, the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is completed, so the read pointer is changed to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Updated.

  Note that the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is not a payout initialization command (step S3304: NO), is not a payout return command (step S3305: NO), and is not a prize ball command (step S3306: NO), The command determination process is terminated without turning on the payout permission flag.

  Returning to the flowchart of FIG. When the command determination process ends, it is determined in step S3202 whether or not the payout permission flag is turned on in the command determination process. Here, if the payout permission flag is not turned on, this processing is ended as it is. That is, it is possible to prevent award balls from being paid out before a command is transmitted from the main controller 261.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3202, the launch permission is set for the launch control device 312 in step S3203, the state return switch 321 is checked in step S3204, and the state return operation is determined to be started. Perform a return operation. With this process, when the state return switch 321 is pressed when a payout error occurs, for example, when the payout motor is clogged, the payout motor is rotated forward and reverse to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state). .

  Thereafter, in step S3205, setting of the lower plate full state or the lower plate full state is performed according to the change in the state of the lower plate 15. That is, when the lower pan 15 is detected based on the detection signal of the lower pan full switch, when the lower pan is full, the lower pan full state is set, and when the lower pan full is not reached , Set the lower pan full release state. In step S3206, setting of a tank ball absence state (out of ball state) or a tank ball absence release state (ball state) is executed in accordance with a change in the state of the tank ball. In other words, the tank ball no switch state is determined based on the detection signal of the tank ball no switch, and the special setting for the absence of the tank ball and the setting for the no tank ball state are executed. Perform configuration.

  Thereafter, in step S3207, for example, the presence / absence of a state to be notified, such as an error state, is determined. If there is a state to be notified, a notification is made.

  Subsequently, a payout control process for prize balls and rental balls is executed. Specifically, a payout number setting process is performed in step S3208, a motor control state acquisition process is performed in step S3209, and a motor drive process is performed in step S3210.

  In step S3211, the state return switch 321 is checked to execute the ball removal process by driving the payout motor 358a on the condition that the ball removal disabled state is not set and the ball removal operation is not started. In a succeeding step S3212, the control of the vibrator 360 (vibration motor control) is executed on condition that the ball is clogged. Thereafter, the process returns to the beginning of the timer interrupt process.

  Next, normal processing of the sub-control device 262 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S3901, the port corresponding to the command input of the input / output port 554 is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is received.

  If a command has been received, the command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553 in step S3902. The command buffer of the RAM 553 is a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands transmitted from the main control device 261. The ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, and commands are stored with regularity from the beginning to the end of the storage area. When commands are stored in all storage areas, the ring buffer is at the start of the storage area. The return command is configured to be updated. Therefore, when the command is stored and when the command is read, the storage pointer and the read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the command is stored and read based on each pointer.

  In the subsequent step S3903, a hold information storage process for storing the information of the advance command output from the main control device 261 in the hold information storage area provided in the RAM 553 is performed. Note that, as described above, the starting command indicates information indicating whether the winning winning opening 33a or the lower winning opening 33b is a variation display triggered by the ball, or whether it is variation information corresponding to the jackpot. Information, information indicating the jackpot type, and information indicating the type of reach are included.

  The hold information storage area includes a first hold information storage area and a second hold information storage area each having four hold areas (holding first to holding fourth areas), like the special variable holding area of the main controller 261. 1 execution area. In the first hold information storage area, in accordance with the reception history of the advance command based on the first change display (information stored in the first special change hold area), information on whether or not the jackpot, jackpot type, and reach type Such variation information is stored in time series. In the second hold information storage area, the change information is stored in time series in accordance with the reception history of the preceding command based on the second change display (information stored in the second special change hold area). By adopting this configuration, information on the first variation display (variation information) triggered by entering the top winning opening 33a and information on the second variation display triggered by entering the bottom winning entrance 33b As a result, the sub-control device 262 can grasp the fluctuation information stored in the first and second special fluctuation hold areas of the main control device 261.

  Hereinafter, the hold information storage process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S4101, it is determined whether or not a starting command has been received (whether or not the starting command has been stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553). If a negative determination is made in step S 4101, the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4101, it is determined in step S4102 whether or not the starting command corresponds to a ball entering the lower winning opening 33b (variation information stored in the second special variation holding area). Is determined. If a negative determination is made here, that is, if the starting command corresponds to a ball entering the top winning opening 33a (variation information stored in the first special variation holding area), in step S4103, the first command An up fluctuation holding counter Nd that counts the number of fluctuation information held in the holding information storage area is incremented by one.

  In the subsequent step S4104, information on whether or not the jackpot is included in the advance command, information on the jackpot type, information on the reach type and the like are stored in the first reserved area in the first holding information storage area.

  In subsequent step S4105, notice information storage processing is performed. In other words, in the present embodiment, there may be intentional derivations of effects related to each other in a plurality of continuous variable displays (so-called “continuous notice” is performed). Here, the value of the continuous notice counter for determining whether to perform continuous notice and the value of the notice type counter for determining the type of continuous notice are acquired, and the counter value is stored in the first hold information Among the areas, the change information is stored in the newly stored reservation area in step S4104.

  The continuous notice counter is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 49, for example, and reaches the upper limit (that is, 49) and then returns to 0 that is the lower limit. The continuous notice counter is periodically updated, and the value of the continuous notice counter is stored in the corresponding counter buffer (continuous notice counter buffer) each time.

  The notice type counter is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 9, for example, and reaches the upper limit (that is, 9) and then returns to 0 that is the lower limit. The notice type counter is periodically updated, and each time the value of the notice type counter is stored in the corresponding counter buffer (notice type counter buffer).

  In the notice information storage process, when the variation information is stored in the hold information storage area, the values of the continuous notice counter and the notice type counter stored in the successive notice counter buffer and the notice type counter buffer are acquired. The Rukoto. Further, each of the holding area and the execution area of the holding information storage area is provided with a continuous notice flag that is turned on when it is determined that a continuous notice is to be derived.

  In the present embodiment, the ROM 552 is provided with a notice success / failure determination table that is taken into consideration when determining whether or not to carry out continuous notice, and a notice table that is taken into consideration when determining the mode of continuous notice. A plurality of advance notice determination tables and advance notice tables are provided, and the advance notice determination table and the advance notice table to be considered are selected according to the variation information.

  After step S4105, in step S4106, one of the first hold lamps 46a in the off state (for example, the leftmost lamp among the four first hold lamps 46a that is turned off) is turned on. State. The first holding lamp 46a of the present embodiment emits blue light. In a succeeding step S4107, a continuous notice lottery process for determining whether or not to execute a continuous notice is performed, and then this process is terminated.

  In the continuous notice lottery process of step S4107, when the value of the up fluctuation hold counter Nd is “2” or more, the big hit is based on the value of the continuous notice counter newly stored in the first hold information storage area. Whether or not to execute the continuous notice is determined by referring to the notice determination table corresponding to the type, the reach type, and the game mode. Furthermore, when it is determined to execute the continuous notice, the notice table corresponding to the jackpot type, reach type, or game mode based on the value of the notice type counter newly stored in the first hold information storage area To determine whether to execute the continuous notice. In addition, the continuous notice flag is turned on for all the holding areas in which the variation information is stored among the holding areas of the first holding information storage area. However, the continuous notice flag in the execution area is not turned on.

  Further, if a negative determination is made in step S4102, that is, if the starting command corresponds to a ball entering the lower winning opening 33b (variation information stored in the second special variation holding area), step Proceeding to S4108, the lower fluctuation hold counter Ne for counting the number of fluctuation information held in the second hold information storage area is incremented by one.

  Thereafter, in step S4109, the information on whether or not the jackpot is included in the advance command, the jackpot type information, the reach type information, etc., is stored in the first reserved area in the second reserved information storage area. . In subsequent step S4110, the value of the continuous notice counter and the value of the notice type counter are acquired, and the counter value is stored in the reserved area in which the variation information is newly stored in step S4109 in the second reserved information storage area.

  After step S4110, in step S4111, one of the second hold lamps 46b in the extinguished state is turned on (for example, the leftmost lamp among the four second lamps 46b that is extinguished). And The second holding lamp 46b of the present embodiment emits red light. In subsequent step S4112, a continuous notice lottery process for determining whether or not to execute a continuous notice is performed, and this process is terminated. Note that the continuous advance notice lottery process in step S4112 merely corresponds to the advance notice lottery process in step S4107 for entering the lower winning opening 33b, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 29, after step S3903 or when a negative determination is made in step S3901, the process proceeds to step S3904, whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached, that is, the start of the previous normal process It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (2 msec in this example) has elapsed since the start. If the predetermined time has already elapsed, the process proceeds to step S3905. On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the previous normal process, the process proceeds to step S3912.

  In step S3905, various counter update processes are executed. The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 uses various counter information when displaying decorative symbols. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 30, the upper, middle, and lower symbols used for setting the out-of-place design symbols CO, the upper symbol display area, the middle symbol display area, and the lower symbol display area. Each symbol counter CL, CM, CR is used. The symbol counters CL, CM, CR are configured such that register values are added using an R register (refresh register) in the CPU 551, and as a result, the numerical values change randomly.

  The jackpot decoration symbol counter CO determines a symbol when the fluctuation symbol of the decoration symbol display device 42 stops when the jackpot state occurs (in this embodiment, as a jackpot decoration symbol counter CO). 9 (0 to 8) counter values are prepared. That is, the jackpot decorative symbol counter CO is incremented by 1 in order within a range of 0 to 8, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 8), returns to 0.

  Then, when the symbol command transmitted from the main control device 261 is “AA11” indicating that the symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot is stopped, based on a table (a table for associating the counter value with the decorative symbol), For example, if the counter value is 0, the combination of jackpot symbols is determined in such a way that “1” (the slot) and 1 if it is “2” (the slot). The jackpot decorative symbol counter CO is periodically updated in the counter update process of step S3905, and is read from the counter buffer of the RAM 553 at the timing when the sub-control device 262 receives the symbol command as will be described later. In this embodiment, the jackpot decoration symbol counter CO is stored in the jackpot decoration symbol counter buffer of the RAM 553, but is not stored in the buffer, and the counter value is referred to at the timing when the symbol command is received. It may be.

  Further, when the symbol command is “AA12” indicating that the symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot is to be stopped, for example, if the counter value is 0, 1, it is “2”. The combination of jackpot symbols is determined such that “4” (for doublet), “6” (for doublet) if 5, 6 or “8” (for doublet) if 7, 8 .

  The upper, middle, and lower symbol counters CL, CM, and CR determine the combination of the stopped symbols in the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas when the winning or failing lottery is lost. Since any of the nine decorative symbols is displayed in the column, nine (0 to 8) counter values are prepared for each. A stop symbol in the upper symbol display area is determined by the upper symbol counter CL, a stop symbol in the middle symbol display area is determined by the middle symbol counter CM, and a stop symbol in the lower symbol display area is determined by the lower symbol counter CR.

  In the present embodiment, the values of the counters CL, CM, and CR are randomly updated by using the value of the R register built in the CPU 551. That is, when each symbol counter CL, CM, CR is updated, the lower 3 bits of the R register are added to the previous value, and when the addition result exceeds the upper limit value, 8 is subtracted to determine the current value. . Each symbol counter CL, CM, CR is updated so that the update times do not overlap, and the combination of these symbol counters CL, CM, CR is the reach / reverse symbol buffer of the RAM 553, the reach symbol buffer other than the front / rear out, and the complete Stored in one of the off symbol buffers.

  Here, the update process of each symbol counter CL, CM, CR will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 31, in step S4001, it is determined whether or not it is time to update the upper symbol counter CL. In step S4002, it is determined whether or not it is time to update the middle symbol counter CM. The upper, middle, and lower symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are configured to be sequentially updated one by one in one update process. Therefore, if the lower symbol counter CR has been updated in the previous update process, an affirmative determination is made in step S4001. If the upper symbol counter CL has been updated in the previous update process, an affirmative determination is made in step S4002. If it is time to update the upper symbol counter CL (YES in step S4001), the process proceeds to step S4003 to update the upper symbol counter CL. If the update time of the medium symbol counter CM (step S4002 is YES), the process proceeds to step S4004 to update the medium symbol counter CM. Further, if it is time to update the lower symbol counter CR (both steps S4001 and S4002 are NO), the process proceeds to step S4005 to update the lower symbol counter CR. In updating the symbol counters CL, CM, CR in steps S4003 to S4005, the value of the lower 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous counter value, and when the addition result exceeds the upper limit value, 8 is subtracted, The calculation result is set as the current value of the off symbol counters CL, CM, CR.

  According to the above-described CL, CM, and CR update processing, the upper, middle, and lower symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are updated one by one in a single update process, and the update times of the counter values overlap. There is no. Thereby, every time the update process is executed three times, one set of the symbol counters CL, CM, CR is updated.

  Thereafter, in step S4006, it is determined whether or not the combination of the updated symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is a combination of reach symbols (the symbols in the upper symbol display area and the symbols in the lower symbol display area are the same). If it is determined that the combination is a reach symbol (YES in S4006), then in step S4007, it is a combination of jackpot symbols (the symbols in the upper and lower symbol display areas are the same as the symbols in the middle symbol display area). Is determined. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4007, this combination is terminated without storing the combination of symbol counters CL, CM, and CR in the RAM 553.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4007, it is determined in step S4008 whether or not the combination of symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is a combination of symbols that are out of front and rear. If the symbol counters CL, CM, CR are a combination of symbols that are out of front / rear (front / rear out of reach) (YES in S4008), the process proceeds to step S4009 and the combination of symbol counters CL, CM, CR at that time is The stored data is stored in the outreach symbol buffer and the process is terminated. If the symbol counters CL, CM, CR are a combination of symbols other than front / rear detachment (reach other than front / rear detachment) (NO in S4008), the process proceeds to step S4010, and the combination of symbol counters CL, CM, CR at that time is combined. Is stored in the reach symbol buffer except for the back and forth detachment of the RAM 553, and the process is terminated.

  Further, if the combination is other than the reach symbol (NO in S4006), the combination of the off symbol counters CL, CM, CR is the combination of the off symbol (completely off symbol). The combination of the time-out symbol counters CL, CM, CR is stored in the complete symbol buffer of the RAM 553, and the process is completed.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 29, a hold process is performed in step S3906. Hereinafter, the hold process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S4201, it is determined whether or not a variation pattern command is received (whether or not the variation pattern command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553). If an affirmative determination is made in step S4201, it is determined in step S4202 whether or not the value of the downward fluctuation hold counter Ne is greater than “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S4202, that is, if the fluctuation information of the second fluctuation display is not stored, the process proceeds to step S4203, and the value of the upper fluctuation holding counter Nd is decremented by one.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the second variation display is preferentially digested over the first variation display, and when the second variation display is stored on hold, the first variation display is digested. Never happen. That is, when the variation information of the second variation display is suspended and stored in the second suspension information storage area, the variation pattern command corresponding to the first variation display is not sent. For this reason, in this embodiment, in step S4202, it is determined whether or not the value of the downward fluctuation hold counter Ne is larger than “0”, so that the fluctuation pattern command is displayed in the first fluctuation display and the second fluctuation display. Which variation information is included is determined. Of course, the variation pattern command is provided with information indicating which variation information of the first variation display or the second variation display is supported, and based on the variation pattern command, the variation pattern command is displayed in the first variation display and It may be determined which variation information of the second variation display is included.

  After step S4203, in step S4204, a process of shifting data stored in the first hold information storage area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data (including the continuous notice flag) stored in the hold first to fourth areas of the first hold information storage area to the execution area side. The data in each area is shifted, such as execution area, second hold area, first hold area, third hold area, second hold area, fourth hold area, third hold area.

  In the following step S4205, one of the first hold lamps 46a that are lit (for example, the rightmost one of the lit first hold lamps 46a) is turned off. After step S4205, the process proceeds to step S4209.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S4202, that is, if even one piece of variation information of the second variation display is retained, in step S4206, 1 is subtracted from the value of the lower variation suspension counter Ne.

  In a succeeding step S4207, a process for shifting the data stored in the second hold information storage area is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the hold first to fourth areas of the second hold information storage area to the execution area side. The hold first area → the execution area, the hold second Data in each area is shifted, such as area → holding first area, holding third area → holding second area, holding fourth area → holding third area. In the present embodiment, there is one execution area for the hold information storage area, and the data stored in the first hold information storage area and the second hold information storage area is displayed in a variable manner corresponding to the data. Will be shifted to a common execution area.

  In the subsequent step S4208, one of the second holding lamps 46b that is lit (for example, the rightmost one of the second holding lamps 46b that is lit) is turned off. After step S4208, the process proceeds to step S4209.

  In step S4209, a notice setting process for determining the type of display effect used for continuous notice is performed. In the notice setting processing in step S4209, it is determined whether or not the continuous notice flag (see the continuous notice lottery process in step S4107) in the execution area of the holding information storage area is on. Since this is not performed, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made, based on the variation information of the variation pattern command, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit, what is the type if it is a big win, and what is the reach type if it is not a big win, etc. The type of continuous notice is determined with reference to the corresponding table. The type of continuous notice determined here is derived at a predetermined timing when the corresponding change display is performed. After step S4209, this process ends.

  In the present embodiment, since the second variation display is preferentially digested over the first variation display, such a first variation is performed when continuous notice is given for a plurality of first variation displays. If there is a ball entering the lower prize opening 33b during the display variation display, the second variation display may interrupt between the plurality of first variation displays, and the continuous notice may be interrupted. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the effect used as the continuous notice is a display effect that can be derived even during normal variable display when the continuous notice is not performed (an effect that can be derived for a single variable display). Is used. For this reason, even if the continuous notice is interrupted, there is no sense of incongruity.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 29, display setting processing is performed in step S3907. Here, based on the information stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553, various arithmetic processes such as generating a display command to be output to the display control device 45 and command output setting are performed. That is, here, the display mode to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 is determined. For example, when a variation pattern command and a symbol command are received, the sub-control device 262 determines a display pattern and the like with reference to the corresponding table based on the variation type, variation time, stop symbol, and the like. Then, control is performed such as outputting the determined items to the display control device 45 as display commands.

  The display control device 45 performs a drawing process in response to a command from the sub-control device 262, and starts the decorative symbol display on the decorative symbol display device. Note that once the variation pattern command is received from the main control device 261, the symbol is coordinated with the sub-control device 262 and the display control device 45 until the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern elapses. Will continue to be displayed.

  Further, when starting the variable display, if the continuous notice flag in the execution area of the hold information storage area (see the continuous notice lottery process in step S4105) is on, each situation is determined based on the fluctuation information of the fluctuation pattern command. Referring to the table corresponding to, the type of the continuous notice to be derived for the variable display is determined, the derivation of the notice effect different from the continuous notice is determined, or the display corresponding to the operation of the effect button 125 is performed. To do. Furthermore, in the display setting process of step S3907, a process for performing effect control during a big hit (a big win display process) is also performed, which will be described later.

  In the lamp setting process in step S3908, the lighting pattern of the lamp / electrical accessories is set in order to synchronize with the display effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 42.

  In the sound setting process in step S3909, the output pattern of the speaker SP is set to synchronize with the display effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 42. In addition, when a voice-related command such as an error notification is transmitted from the main control device 261, settings for performing these controls are also performed in step S3909.

  In step S3910, other processing such as control setting of a waiting-for-waiting effect (for example, a demonstration screen display set to be displayed when a predetermined time elapses without the decorative symbol display device 42 being changed) is performed. Do.

  In step 3911, an external output process for transmitting a control signal based on the setting contents in steps S3905 to 3910 to each device is executed. For example, a display command is transmitted to the display control device 45 when the decorative symbol display device 42 displays the variation of the decorative symbol.

  After the processing of steps S3905 to S3911 performed every 2 msec is performed, or when a negative determination is made in step S3904, the process proceeds to step S3912, and whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 553 is determined. Is determined. The information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored when a power interruption command is received from the main controller 261.

  If the occurrence information of the power interruption is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3913, and it is determined whether or not the RAM 553 is destroyed. If the RAM 553 is not destroyed here, the process returns to step S3901 and the normal process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 553 is destroyed, the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processing.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3912 that the power-off occurrence information is stored, power-off processing is executed in step S3914. In power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited and each output port is turned off. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased. After executing the power-off process, the process loops infinitely.

  Next, the jackpot display process performed in the display setting process of step S3907 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S4701, it is determined whether or not an opening command for notifying the start of the big hit state is received from the main control device 261. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4701, in step S4702, the round grasp counter for grasping the number of remaining rounds is set to “16” if it is “16RS” based on the information included in the opening command. If it is “7RS” or “7RN”, “7” is set.

  Thereafter, in step S4703, an opening effect is set for 8 seconds (the image of the decorative symbol display device 42, the sound of the speaker SP, and the lighting state of various lamps), and then the process ends. The sub-control device 262 is provided with a table for storing the correspondence relationship between the jackpot type, the number of remaining rounds, and various effects in the jackpot state, and selects a corresponding effect with reference to the table. And it will be executed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4701, it is determined in step S4704 whether an interval command has been received. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4704, in step S4705, the effect is set during a round of 30 seconds at the maximum, and then this process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4704, it is determined in step S4706 whether an interval command has been received. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4706, the round grasp counter is decremented by 1 in step S4707, and the effect is set in the interval of 4 seconds in step S4708, and then this process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4706, it is determined in step S4709 whether an ending command has been received. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4709, the round grasp counter is decremented by 1 in step S4710, and the ending effect is set for 10 seconds in step S4711, and then this process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4709, it is determined in step S4712 whether a jackpot end command has been received. If a negative determination is made in step S4712, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4712, the ending display is immediately ended in step S4713, and the normal gaming state mode in which the variable display is performed is set. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  In the present embodiment, various effects are performed using the effect button unit 120 and the motion detection unit 451. Hereinafter, processing related to the effect button unit 120 and the motion detection unit 451 will be described.

  First, the additional effect setting process will be described with reference to FIG. The additional effect setting process is executed in the display setting process (step S3907) of the normal process (FIG. 29) of the sub-control device 262.

  First, in step S7101, it is determined whether a variation pattern command has been received. If a negative determination is made in step S7101, the present process ends. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7101, it is determined in step S7102 whether or not a big hit state occurs based on a variation pattern command or the like. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7102, it is determined in step S7103 whether or not the value of the action effect counter is “0 to 4”. Here, the “action effect” is an effect using the motion detection unit 451, and the action effect counter is incremented one by one in the range of “0 to 9”, for example, and reaches the upper limit value. The loop counter returns to the lower limit value. Further, the action effect counter is periodically updated, and the value of the action effect counter is stored in the corresponding counter buffer (action effect counter buffer) each time it is updated. In step S7103, it is determined whether or not the value of the action effect counter buffer stored in the action effect counter buffer is “0 to 4”.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S7103, the value of the action selection counter is acquired in step S7104, and the action effect pattern group is determined with reference to the first action group selection table. Here, the action selection counter is, for example, a loop counter that is incremented one by one in the range of “0 to 39”, and returns to the lower limit value after reaching the upper limit value. Further, the action selection counter is periodically updated, and the value of the action selection counter is stored in the corresponding counter buffer (action selection counter buffer) each time it is updated.

  In addition, the first action group selection table is a table that is referred to when an action effect is executed at the time of a big hit or in the probability variation mode, and as shown in FIG. Values and action effect pattern groups are associated with each other. That is, the action effect pattern is determined by a combination of detections of the motion detection unit 451 (the motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5 and the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2). In step S7104, the action effect pattern Rather than deciding itself, it is decided how many combinations of the detection of the motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5 and the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2 are reflected in the action effect (effective detection as an element that determines the pattern of the action effect) (The number of detection inputs is determined). In step S7104, an action effect pattern group is determined by referring to the first action group selection table based on the value of the action selection counter stored in the action selection counter buffer.

  When referring to the first action group selection table, if the value of the action selection counter is “38, 39, 0”, the detection signals from the operation detection sensors ME1 to ME5 and the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2 are 2 Until the count is accepted, any further detection is invalidated (the detection input upper limit number is 2 counts). Moreover, although mentioned later in detail, in this embodiment, although the effect according to the combination of the two motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5 detected at the time of the action effect and the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2 is executed, the control is performed. In order to simplify the process, the detection combinations of the motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5 and the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2 are not stored in association with the effects but can be input as detection signals. The motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5 and the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2 are limited to some extent (for example, all of the motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5 and the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2 arranged along the window 101). Combination from 6).

  If the value of the action selection counter is “32 to 37”, the detection input upper limit number is 3 counts. If the value of the action selection counter is “12 to 21”, the detection input upper limit number is 4 counts. . Further, when the value of the action selection counter is “22 to 31”, the detection input upper limit number is 3 counts, and when the value of the action selection counter is “2 to 11”, the detection input upper limit number is 4 counts. However, in these patterns, when the timing for operating the effect button 125 comes, the effect button 125 protrudes (the main body 405 is displaced to the protruding position). In addition, if the value of the action selection counter is “1”, the detection input upper limit count is 5 counts. In this case, the motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5 and the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2 The detection order (combination) is navigated by the decorative symbol display device 42 and the three-color LED 452 of the motion detection unit 451.

  In the action effect, the larger the detection input upper limit number, the higher the degree of expectation for jackpot. Further, the navigation in the action effect is performed only when the jackpot is finally taught with a special effect. When the first action group selection table is referred to, navigation other than 5 counts is performed. It can also happen.

  After step S7104, the action effect flag is set to ON in step S7105, and the action input counter is set in step S7106. Here, the action effect flag is a flag indicating whether or not to execute the action effect. The action input counter is a counter indicating the remaining number of times until the detection input upper limit number, and here, the detection input upper limit number determined with reference to the first action group selection table is set.

  By the way, when the “action effect” is executed, the decorative symbol display device 42 is instructed to start the action effect, and the pose desired by the player, more detailed explanation, that is, the motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5, and Since there is the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2, guidance indicating that a hand should be brought close thereto is displayed. At this time, by making the three-color LED 452 emit light, the locations of the motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5 and the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2 are easily recognized. Then, until the set number of detection inputs is reached, a display corresponding to each detection of the motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5 and the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2 (display of a pause corresponding to the detection of the sensor) is performed. At the same time, an instruction regarding the next operation is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42. When the detection of the motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5 and the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2 reaches the detection input upper limit number, the operation guidance to the effect button 125 is displayed, and the player operates the effect button 125. An effect corresponding to the combination of detection by the motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5 and the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2 is executed (for example, the result of the lottery is taught with a predetermined effect). .

  If a negative determination is made in step S7103, it is determined in step S7107 whether the value of the button effect counter is “0 to 39”. Here, the button effect counter is, for example, a loop counter that is incremented one by one in the range of “0 to 59” and returns to the lower limit value after reaching the upper limit value. Each time, the value of the button effect counter is stored in the corresponding counter buffer (button effect counter buffer).

  If a negative determination is made in step S7107, the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7107, the button effect pattern is determined in step S7108 by referring to the first button effect selection table based on the value of the button effect counter stored in the button effect counter buffer. To do. Here, the first button effect selection table is a table that is referred to when the button effect is executed at the time of the big hit, and as shown in FIG. 47 (a), the value of the button effect counter and the button effect are displayed. Patterns are associated with each other.

  More specifically, when the value of the button effect counter is “2 to 17”, the effect button 125 is projected at the start of an effective period in which the operation input of the effect button 125 is valid (the main body 405 is set to the protruding position). And setting for causing the three-color LED 414 incorporated in the effect button 125 to emit white light. When the value of the button effect counter is “18 to 25”, the effect button 125 is projected at the start of the effective period, and the effect button 125 is set to emit red light. When the value of the button effect counter is “26 to 31”, a setting for causing the effect button 125 to emit white light at the start of the effective period is performed (the effect button 125 is not protruded). When the value of the button effect counter is “32 to 36”, a setting for causing the effect button 125 to emit red light at the start of the effective period is performed (the effect button 125 is not protruded).

  Further, when the value of the button effect counter is “37, 38”, the effect button 125 emits white light at the start of the effective period, and the effect button is detected by both detection of the unit side proximity detection sensor AE1 and the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2. Settings for causing 125 to emit red light (changing the light emission color) are performed. Further, when the value of the button effect counter is “39”, the effect button 125 is made to emit red light at the start of the effective period, and the effect button 125 is turned on when both the unit side proximity detection sensor AE1 and the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2 are detected. Set for rainbow-colored emission.

  If the value of the button effect counter is “0”, the effect button 125 is caused to emit white light at the start of the effective period, and the effect button 125 is activated by both detections of the unit-side proximity detection sensor AE1 and the frame-side proximity detection sensor AE2. Settings for immersing (displace the main body 405 to the immersive position) are performed. When the value of the button effect counter is “1”, the effect button 125 emits white light at the start of the effective period, and after the operation of the operation unit 406 is detected by the operation detection sensor 427, the player can When the hands are released and the unit-side proximity detection sensor AE1 and the frame-side proximity detection sensor AE2 are no longer detected, the effect button 125 is set to project and the rainbow color is emitted.

  In a succeeding step S7109, the corresponding one of the first to third button effect flags indicating that the button effect is executed is set on. That is, in the case of a pattern accompanied by a change in the state of the effect button 125 by the detection of the unit side proximity detection sensor AE1 and the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2 (the effect button 125 is discolored or immersed), the second button effect flag is displayed. The third button effect flag is set in the case of a pattern that is set and causes the effect button 125 to protrude after the player's operation of the effect button 125, and the first button effect flag is set in the case of other patterns.

  In step S7106 or step S7110 which moves after step S7109, the valid preparation flag is set on. Here, the valid preparation flag is a flag indicating that it is a previous stage of a valid period in which the detection (input) of the motion detection unit 451 and the effect button 125 is valid. In subsequent step S7111, the effective period control timer is set. Here, the effective period control timer is a timer used for time control of the effective period. In step S7111, a value corresponding to the time from the start of the variable display to the start of the effective period is set.

  Further, in step S7112 after step S7111, it is determined whether or not the value of the air effect counter is any one of “0 to 19”. Here, the air effect counter is a loop counter that, for example, is incremented one by one in a range of “0 to 49” and reaches the upper limit value and then returns to the lower limit value. Further, the air effect counter is periodically updated, and the value of the action selection counter is stored in the corresponding counter buffer (air effect selection counter buffer) each time it is updated. In step S7112, it is determined whether or not the value of the air effect counter stored in the air effect selection counter buffer is “0 to 19”.

  If a negative determination is made in step S7112, the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7112, the air effect pattern is determined in step S7113 by referring to the air effect table based on the value of the air effect counter stored in the air effect selection counter buffer. Here, the air effect selection table is a table that is referred to when the air effect is executed, and as shown in FIG. 48, the value of the air effect counter is associated with the air effect pattern.

  More specifically, when the value of the air effect counter is “4, 5”, the air discharged from the effect button 125 in the Y-shaped tube 435 of the exhaust passage 432 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The opening of the first valve 438 provided in the first passage 436 is set to 0% (completely closed), and the second passage 437 provided in the second passage 437 that guides the air discharged from the effect button 125 to the handle 18. The opening degree of the valve 439 is set to 100% (completely open). In this case, when the operation unit 406 of the effect button 125 is operated, almost 100% of the air pushed out from the effect button 125 is supplied to the handle 18 and the vent hole 18b formed on the front side of the handle 18 is formed. It will be blown out. In the present embodiment, the air effect is likely to be executed only when teaching the jackpot or the probability variation mode.

  Further, when the value of the air effect counter is “6, 7”, the opening degree of the first valve 438 is set to 50%, and the opening degree of the second valve 439 is set to 50%. When the value of the air effect counter is “8 to 11”, the opening degree of the first valve 438 is set to 70%, and the opening degree of the second valve 439 is set to 30%. When the value of the air effect counter is “12 to 19”, the opening degree of the first valve 438 is set to 90%, and the opening degree of the second valve 439 is set to 10%. Naturally, if the opening degree of the second valve 439 is small, the amount of air blown from the handle 18 based on the operation of the effect button 125 is small, and it becomes difficult to notice.

  Further, when the value of the air effect counter is “2, 3”, the opening degree of the first valve 438 is set to 100%, the opening degree of the second valve 439 is set to 0%, and the air pump 440 is set to “weak”. Now drive continuously. Thus, when the second valve 439 is closed and the air pump 440 is driven, air is sent to the inside of the effect button 125 (main body portion 405), and the atmospheric pressure is increased. In this state, if the operation unit 406 is pressed, the pressure in the main body 405 is higher than usual, so that a larger force than usual is required to displace the operation unit 406 to the operation position side. . In other words, the player feels that the operation of the production button 125 is “harder” than usual, and from such a sense of incongruity, it can be reminiscently associated with the fact that it is not normal and that a big hit state is generated.

  Further, when the value of the air effect counter is “1”, the opening degree of the first valve 438 is set to 100%, the opening degree of the second valve 439 is set to 0%, and the air pump 440 is set to “weak” strength. Drive intermittently. In this case, when the player presses the operation unit 406, it feels like the operation unit 406 vibrates. Note that the operation unit 406 may be recognized to vibrate up and down when viewed without touching the effect button 125.

  In addition, when the value of the air effect counter is “0”, the opening degree of the first valve 438 is set to 100%, the opening degree of the second valve 439 is set to 100%, and the strength of the air pump 440 is set to “strong”. To drive continuously. In this case, the wind blows out from the handle 18, and when the effect button 125 is operated, the operation unit 406 becomes harder to be pushed.

  After step S7113, in step S7114, the air effect flag indicating that the air effect is to be executed is set on, and then the process ends.

  Also, if a negative determination is made in step S7102, it is determined in step S7115 whether or not front / rear reach will occur based on a variation pattern command or the like. If a negative determination is made in step S 7115, that is, if it is neither a big hit nor a back-and-forth out of reach, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S 7115, it is determined in step S 7116 whether or not the value of the action effect counter buffer stored in the action effect counter buffer is “0, 1”.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S7116, in step S7117, an action effect pattern group is determined with reference to the second action group selection table based on the value of the action selection counter stored in the action selection counter buffer. Here, the second action group selection table is a table that is referred to when an action effect is executed at the time of detachment or in the time reduction mode or the normal mode. As shown in FIG. 45 (b), if the value of the action selection counter is “25 to 39”, the detection input upper limit number is 2 counts, and the motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5 and the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2 are used. When the detection signal is received up to 2 counts, further detection is invalidated.

  If the value of the action selection counter is “10 to 24”, the detection input upper limit number is 3 counts. If the value of the action selection counter is “1 to 5”, the detection input upper limit number is 4 counts. . Furthermore, if the value of the action selection counter is “6-9”, the detection input upper limit number is 3 counts, and if the value of the action selection counter is “0”, the detection input upper limit number is 4 counts. However, in these patterns, the number of times of detection by the motion detection units 451 (the motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5 and the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2) reaches the detection input upper limit number, and the timing of operating the effect button 125 is further increased. When it arrives, the effect button 125 protrudes (the main body 405 is displaced to the protruding position).

  After step S7117, the action effect flag is set to ON in step S7118, and in step S7119, the detection input upper limit number determined with reference to the second action group selection table is input to the action input counter.

  In step S7120, the effective preparation flag is set to ON. In step S7121, the effective period control timer is set to the time until the start of presentation, and then the process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S7116, it is determined in step S7122 whether or not the value of the button effect counter stored in the button effect counter buffer is “0 to 19”. If a negative determination is made in step S7122, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7122, the button effect pattern is determined in step S7123 by referring to the second button effect selection table based on the value of the button effect counter stored in the button effect counter buffer. To do. Here, the second button effect selection table is a table that is referred to when the button effect is executed at the time of detachment, and as shown in FIG. Patterns are associated with each other.

  More specifically, when the value of the button effect counter is “0 to 4”, the effect button 125 is projected at the start of an effective period in which the operation input of the effect button 125 is valid (the main body 405 is set to the protruding position). And setting for causing the three-color LED 414 incorporated in the effect button 125 to emit white light. When the value of the button effect counter is “5”, the effect button 125 is projected at the start of the effective period, and the setting for causing the effect button 125 to emit red light is performed. When the value of the button effect counter is “6 to 12”, setting for causing the effect button 125 to emit red light is performed (the effect button 125 is not projected). When the value of the button effect counter is “13 to 18”, a setting for causing the effect button 125 to emit white light at the start of the effective period is performed (the effect button 125 is not protruded). When the value of the button effect counter is “19”, the effect button 125 is caused to emit white light at the start of the effective period, and the effect button 125 is activated by both detections of the unit side proximity detection sensor AE1 and the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2. Make settings for emitting red light (changing the light emission color).

  Thereafter, in step S7124, in the case of a pattern accompanied by a change in the state of the effect button 125 by the detection of the unit side proximity detection sensor AE1 and the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2 (the effect button 125 is discolored), the second button effect flag is set. In the case of other patterns, the first button effect flag is set. Subsequently, the process is terminated through step S7120 (turning on the valid preparation flag) and step S7121 (setting of the valid period control timer).

  Next, the valid period preparation process will be described with reference to FIG. The valid period preparation process is executed in the normal process of the sub-control device 262 (for example, every 2 msec). In step S7201, it is determined whether the effective preparation flag is set to ON. Incidentally, the effective preparation flag is turned on when execution of action effect or button effect is determined in the additional effect setting process. If a negative determination is made in step S7201, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7201, it is determined in step S7202 whether or not the value of the effective period control timer is “0”.

  If a negative determination is made in step S7202, the value of the effective period control timer is decremented by 1 in step S7203, and then this process ends. On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step S7202, the effective preparation flag is turned off in step S7204. In the following step S7205, it is determined whether or not the action effect flag is set on. If a negative determination is made in step S7205, that is, if a button effect is performed, in step S7206, an effective period flag indicating that the operation of the effect button 125 is an effective effective period is set on, and in step S7207 A value corresponding to the length of the valid period is set in the valid period control timer. After that, in step S7208, the button effect of the pattern set with reference to the first or second button effect selection table (see FIG. 47) is started, and in step S7209, the button input guidance for prompting the operation of the effect button 125 is started. After the setting (for example, display on the decorative symbol display device 42, voice announcement, etc.) is set, this processing is terminated.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S7205, that is, if an action effect is performed, in step S7210, the detection of the operation detection unit 451 (the operation detection sensors ME1 to ME5 and the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2) is detected. An action reception flag indicating that the action input period is effective as an element for determining the action effect pattern is set to ON. In a succeeding step S7211, a value corresponding to the length of the action input period is set for the effective period control timer.

  Further, in step S7212, an action presentation of a pattern set with reference to the first or second action group selection table (see FIG. 45) is started, and in step S7213, an action input guidance for prompting an operation of the presentation button 125. (For example, display on the decorative symbol display device 42, light emission of the three-color LED 452 corresponding to the motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5 and the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2, voice announcement, etc.) finish.

  In the action effect in the present embodiment, among the motion detection units 451, the motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5 and the frame side proximity sensor AE2 are used. Furthermore, when performing an action, not all of the motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5 and the frame side proximity sensor AE2 always accept detection inputs, but the motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5 and the frame side proximity. Among the sensors AE2, the motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5 and the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2 that perform detection are limited according to the state (the number is narrowed down in order to simplify the control). In the action input guidance, the motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5 in which the detection input is valid and the three-color LEDs 452 of the frame side proximity sensor AE2 are turned on (or blinking), and the other motion detection sensors ME1 to ME10, Then, the three-color LED 452 of the frame side proximity sensor AE2 is turned off.

  Next, the action input process will be described with reference to FIG. The action input process is executed in the normal process of the sub-control device 262 (for example, every 2 msec). First, in step S7301, it is determined whether or not the action acceptance flag is set to ON. If a negative determination is made in step S7301, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7301, it is determined in step S7302 whether the valid period flag is set on.

  If a negative determination is made in step S7302, it is determined in step S7303 whether there is detection information of the operation detection unit 451 (the operation detection sensors ME1 to ME5 and the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2). If an affirmative determination is made in step S7303, the value of the action input counter is decremented by 1 in step S7304.

  In subsequent step S7305, the detection information of the current motion detection unit 451 is stored in the action storage area as the motion storage area provided in the RAM 553 of the sub-control device 262. The action storage area includes four storage areas, a first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area, and detection information of the motion detection unit 451 is stored in the first storage area → the second storage area. They are stored in time series in the order of area → third storage area → fourth storage area. That is, referring to the action storage area, it is possible to grasp the combination and order of the detections of the motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5 and the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2. In this embodiment, the upper limit number of detection inputs to the motion detection unit 451 at the time of action presentation may be 5 counts. In this case, the detection combination and order of the motion detection unit 451 is one pattern. The pattern is navigated. Therefore, it is only necessary to know the combination and order of detection of the motion detection unit 451 when the maximum number of detection input is 4 counts, and the action storage area has four storage areas.

  Thereafter, in step S7306, an effect process corresponding to the detection by the motion detection unit 451 is performed, and then in step S7307, it is determined whether or not the value of the action input counter is “0”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7307, that is, if the number of times detected by the motion detection unit 451 in the action input period has reached the detection input upper limit number, the effective period flag is set on in step S7308, and step S7309 In step S7310, a value corresponding to the length of the effective period is set in the effective period control timer, and the button input guidance for prompting the operation of the effect button 125 is set in step S7310.

  In addition, when a negative determination is made in step S7303 or step S7307, that is, even if there is no detection information of the motion detection unit 451 or the detection information of the motion detection unit 451 is confirmed, the number of detections becomes the detection input upper limit number. If not reached, it is determined in step S7311 whether or not the value of the effective period control timer is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S7311, 1 is subtracted from the value of the effective period control timer in step S7312, and action input guidance is set in step S7313, and then the present process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7311, that is, if the action input period of the action effect elapses without the detection count of the motion detection unit 451 reaching the detection input upper limit count, the action acceptance flag is set in step S7314. In step S7315, the action effect flag is set to OFF, and in step S7316, the action input guidance is terminated. Then, in step S7317, a time-up display setting indicating that the action input period of the action effect has ended is set, and then the present process ends.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S7302, that is, if the input operation of the effect button 125 is in a valid period during the action effect, the operation of the effect button 125 (operation detection sensor 427) is determined in step S7318. Is detected). If an affirmative determination is made in step S7318, in step S7319, an action result effect that teaches the end of the action effect is determined based on the detection information stored in the action storage area and information on whether or not the game is a big hit. Then, the derivation process is performed.

  In the present embodiment, the detection information stored in the action storage area, the detection combinations of the motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5 and the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2, the order, and the action result effect pattern An action pattern determination table showing correspondence is provided. For example, when the detection input upper limit number is 4 counts, an action result effect pattern is determined with reference to an action pattern determination table as shown in FIG. That is, when the value of the action input counter is “4” and the detection information is not yet stored in the action storage area, the three-color LEDs 452 of the motion detection sensors ME1, ME2, ME3, and the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2. Is turned on, and the decorative symbol display device 42 performs action input guidance for urging the user to hold the hand over the sensor (step S7213 of the valid period preparation process).

  For example, when the motion detection sensor ME1 detects, the detection information is stored in the first storage area of the action storage area (step S7305 of the action input process), and the value of the action input counter is “3”. (Step S7304). Further, action input guidance is performed to light up the three-color LEDs 452 of the motion detection sensors ME2 and AE2 and to urge the decorative symbol display device 42 to hold the hand over the sensors (step S7313). When the storage process of these detection information in the action storage area and the action input guidance setting process are repeated until the value of the action input counter becomes “0” (Yes in step S7307), the effect button 125 The operation becomes valid (step S7308). When the effect button 125 is operated (Yes in step S7318), the action content effect pattern is determined by comparing the stored contents of the action storage area with the action pattern determination table.

  The action pattern determination table includes a detection input upper limit count for 4 counts, a detection input upper limit count for 2 counts, and a detection input upper limit count for 3 counts, and a big hit each. For use and removal are prepared, and those used in step S7319 are appropriately selected. Also, the stored contents of the action storage area will be deleted when the setting of the action result effect in step S7319 is completed. In addition, the table configuration of the action pattern determination table is not particularly limited, and can be appropriately set for each model.

  After step S7319, the action acceptance flag is set off in step S7320, the valid period flag is set off in step S7321, and the action effect flag is set off in step S7322. Then, after the button input guidance is terminated in step S7323, the present process is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S7318, it is determined in step S7324 whether or not the value of the effective period control timer is “0”. In step S7325, 1 is subtracted from the value of the effective period control timer, and then this process is terminated. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7324, that is, if there is no operation on the effect button 125 in the effective period of the action effect and the effective period has elapsed, the effective period of the action effect ends in step S7326. After setting up the time-up display that teaches that, this processing is terminated.

  Although not specifically mentioned in the present embodiment, in order to improve the convenience of the player who does not want to participate in the action production, the action reception flag is set on and the validity period flag is set off, It is configured such that the value of the effective period control timer is subtracted by a predetermined amount in response to confirmation of the operation of the effect button 125, or based on the stored information in the action storage area when the operation of the effect button 125 is confirmed. The action result effect setting (the processing in step S7319 and subsequent steps) may be performed. In this embodiment, the function (step S7210, step S7314, step S7320) for turning on and off the action reception flag constitutes the operation input state switching means.

  Next, the button effect execution process will be described with reference to FIG. The button effect execution process is executed in the normal process of the sub-control device 262 (for example, every 2 msec).

  First, in step S7401, it is determined whether or not the valid period flag is set on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7401, it is determined in step S7402 whether one of the first to third button effect flags is set on. If a negative determination is made in step S7401, or if a negative determination is made in step S7402, the process ends.

  On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S7402, that is, when the button effect is being performed, in step S7403, the separation monitoring flag for executing the button effect when the third button effect flag is set on is turned on. Determine whether it is set. If a negative determination is made in step S7403, it is determined in step S7404 whether or not there is an operation of the effect button 125 (detection of the operation detection sensor 427). If an affirmative determination is made in step S7404, it is determined in step S7405 whether the third button effect flag is set on.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S7405, the separation monitoring flag is set on in step S7406, and then this process ends. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S7405, the first button effect flag is turned off in step S7407.

  Thereafter, in step S7408, an effect (result effect) corresponding to the operation of the effect button 125 is determined and derived based on the information indicating whether or not the jackpot is achieved. Note that the determination method of the result effect in step S7408 is not particularly limited, and a button effect pattern may or may not be added. For example, such a result presentation may be determined using a loop counter that is updated at a predetermined timing and a table for jackpot and losing that stores the correspondence between the value of the loop counter and the presentation pattern. .

  In subsequent step S7409, the validity period flag is set to OFF, and the button input guidance is terminated in step S7410, and then the present process is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S7404, that is, if the effect button 125 is not sparse, it is determined in step S7411 whether the second button effect flag is set on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7411, it is determined in step S7412 whether or not both the unit side proximity detection sensor AE1 and the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2 have been detected.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S7412, in step S7413, processing for executing a proximity response effect (see FIG. 47) corresponding to proximity detection is performed. That is, when immersing the effect button 125, the stepping motor 407 of the effect button 125 is driven to displace the main body 405 downward to the immersive position as shown in FIG. Thereby, the operation surface of the operation unit 406 is accommodated below the upper surface of the mounting base 403 (in this example, substantially flush) even though the player has not operated the operation unit 406 yet. Will be.

  Further, when changing the emission color of the effect button 125, a signal corresponding to the LED board 413 of the effect button 125 is output. In the present embodiment, the button effect or the like is performed in conjunction with the display effect on the decorative symbol display device 42. In particular, when a pattern that changes the emission color of the effect button 125 is selected, the unit side proximity detection sensor When the detection of both the AE1 and the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2 is performed, a display suggesting the result of the display effect on the decorative symbol display device 42 is derived. For example, in the effect that the character makes a predetermined challenge in the decorative symbol display device 42, the success expectation degree of the challenge is suggested around the character at the timing when the unit side proximity detection sensor AE1 and the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2 are detected. As described above, an aura associated with a color and a size may be displayed, or a cut-in image of a character may be displayed. This suggests what will happen to the result of the button operation immediately before operating the effect button 125, so that the effect when the result of the button operation is announced can be enjoyed in two stages. In addition, since such an effect is not determined arbitrarily on the pachinko machine 10 side but is derived at the timing when the proximity of the player's hand is detected, the timing at which such an effect occurs is determined by the player's uplifting feeling. The situation of shifting can be suppressed.

  Thereafter, the second button effect flag is set to OFF in step S7414. In the present embodiment, when the proximity corresponding effect is performed, the process proceeds as if the operation of the effect button 125 is performed regardless of whether the operation detection sensor 427 is detected. After step S7414, a process for determining and deriving a result effect is performed in step S7408, the validity period flag is set to OFF in step S7409, the button input guidance is terminated in step S7410, and the process is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S7411 or step S7412, it is determined in step S7415 whether or not the value of the effective period control timer is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S7415, the value of the effective period control timer is decremented by 1 in step S7416, and then this process ends.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7415, the first to third button effect flags that are set to ON are set to OFF in step S7417, and the effective period of operation of the effect button 125 ends in step S7418. Set the time-up display to indicate that. Thereafter, the validity period flag is set to OFF in step S7409, the button input guidance is terminated in step S7410, and then the present process is terminated.

  If the determination in step S7403 is affirmative, that is, if the effect button 125 is operated with the third button effect flag set on, in step S7419, the unit side proximity detection sensor AE1 and the frame side proximity It is determined whether or not detection is being performed in either of the detection sensors AE2. In other words, after the player operates the effect button 125, the hand operating the effect button 125 does not detect the unit-side proximity detection sensor AE1 and the frame-side proximity detection sensor AE2 from the effect button 125. It is determined whether or not they have left. If a negative determination is made in step S7319, the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7419, in step S7420, a process of executing a button protrusion effect that causes the effect button 125 to protrude is performed. That is, the stepping motor 407 of the effect button 125 is driven to displace the main body 405 upward to the protruding position as shown in FIG. Thereby, when the player releases his hand from the operation unit 406, the operation unit 406 protrudes larger than the operation unit 406, or when he thinks that the player has released his hand from the operation unit 406, the operation unit 406 sticks to his hand. Will be derived.

  Thereafter, the third button effect flag is set to OFF in step S7421. In the present embodiment, when the button projection effect is performed, the process proceeds as if the operation of the effect button 125 is performed regardless of whether the operation detection sensor 427 is detected. After step S7421, a process for determining and deriving a result effect is performed in step S7408, the validity period flag is set to OFF in step S7409, the button input guidance is terminated in step S7410, and the process is terminated.

  Note that the process of confirming the operation of the normal effect button 125 is performed separately from the action input process and the button effect execution process, and when the operation detection sensor 427 is detected, a process corresponding to the situation as appropriate. However, when the action acceptance flag and the button effect flag are set to ON, the normal operation confirmation process does not execute the corresponding process, and the action input process and the button effect execution process are not executed. I will leave it to you.

  In the present embodiment, statistics on how to operate the effect button 125 are taken. In other words, in the present embodiment, an operation speed measurement that measures the time from the detection of both the unit side proximity detection sensor AE1 and the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2 to the detection of the operation detection sensor 427 in the effective period. An approach speed measuring timer as a means and an operation time measuring timer for measuring the time continuously detected by the operation detection sensor 427 are provided. Further, as an operation preference counting means, for example, a high-speed operation counter that is incremented by 1 when the measurement time of the approach speed measurement timer is less than 0.1 seconds, for example, and 1 when it is greater than or equal to 1 second. And a low-speed operation counter. Further, a long press operation counter is provided in which 1 is added when the measurement time of the operation time measurement timer is, for example, 0.5 seconds or more in the effective period.

  Then, in accordance with the values of the high-speed operation counter, the low-speed operation counter, and the long-press operation counter, the result effect determination method (selected result effect pattern) performed according to the operation of the effect button 125 changes. Configured to get. For example, the start timing of the result presentation is normally the time when the operation detection sensor 427 has detected, but when the value of the long press operation counter is equal to or greater than a specified value, the start timing of the result presentation is the operation detection sensor. You may comprise so that it may become the time when detection of 427 is no longer performed. In addition, when the value of the low speed operation counter is equal to or greater than the specified value, the value of the low speed operation counter is 1 when the first button effect selection table (see FIG. 47A) is referred to (when it is a big hit). When added, (when a predetermined time elapses after the player's hand starts waiting immediately above the effect button 125), the light emission color of the effect button 125 is easily changed to red or rainbow. Or at the timing when the value of the low speed operation counter is incremented by 1, a displacement operation is performed such that the effect button 125 protrudes and contacts the player's hand from the effect button 125 side, or the value of the low speed operation counter is Even if 1 is added, when the unit side proximity detection sensor AE1 and the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2 are not detected without pressing the effect button 125, the corresponding effect is introduced. It may be or. Furthermore, for example, when an effect that fails when the effect button 125 is operated is once generated, but there is a revival effect that turns to success after that, when the value of the high-speed operation counter is equal to or greater than a specified value, While the selection ratio of the revival effect is lowered, the final result may be easily displayed by one operation of the effect button 125. In addition, in order to protect the effect button 125, for example, when the measurement time of the approach speed measurement timer is less than 0 or 1 second, a warning announcement (display such as gentle operation) may be performed. . Further, when the value of the high-speed operation counter (which may be a value obtained by subtracting the value of the low-speed operation counter from the value of the high-speed operation counter) exceeds a specified value, or the number increases after the specified value is exceeded, a predetermined penalty (For example, the occurrence probability of the effect itself using the effect button 125 decreases) may be implemented.

  In the present embodiment, a game such as the number of jackpots and the number of fluctuations between the pachinko machine 10 and a server such as a gaming machine manufacturer via a portable communication terminal (such as a mobile phone or a smartphone) carried by the player. Data can be exchanged. At the end of the game, the two-dimensional code displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 of the pachinko machine 10 is read by the mobile communication terminal and accessed to the server, so that the game data and the server are accumulated. Yes. The two-dimensional code also includes information indicating the values of the high-speed operation counter, the low-speed operation counter, and the long press operation counter, and the values of such counters are accumulated in the server. Furthermore, the password issued by the server includes not only information based on the game information but also accumulated information of the values of the high-speed operation counter, the low-speed operation counter, and the long-press operation counter, and the password is stored in the pachinko machine 10. By inputting, it is possible to produce effects according to the accumulated information of the counter.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of this example, when the power is turned off, the values of the high-speed operation counter, the low-speed operation counter, and the long-press operation counter are deleted, but when the two-dimensional code is displayed. You may comprise so that it may erase | eliminate. Further, the various effects described above may be configured to be performed other than when the values of the high speed operation counter, the low speed operation counter, and the long press operation counter satisfy predetermined conditions. For example, in a case where a big hit state occurs, the decorative symbol display device 42 provides guidance for prompting the operation of the effect button, and in response to this, the player's hand close to the effect button 125 and the like close to the unit side When at least one of the detection sensor AE1 and the frame-side proximity detection sensor AE2 is detected, guidance on waiting for the operation of the effect button 125 is performed on the decorative symbol display device 42, and above the effect button 125 (unit-side proximity detection sensor Even if the player's hand or the like is waiting for a predetermined time in an area detected by at least one of AE1 and the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2), the operation unit 406 protrudes and emits light. Good.

  Next, the air effect execution process will be described with reference to FIG. The air effect execution process is executed in the normal process of the sub-control device 262 (for example, every 2 msec).

  First, in step S7501, it is determined whether the valid period flag is set on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7501, it is determined in step S7502 whether or not the air effect flag is set on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7502, it is determined in step S7503 whether or not both the unit side proximity detection sensor AE1 and the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2 have been detected. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7503, the air effect set with reference to the air effect selection table (FIG. 48) is started in step S7504, and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S7501, step S7502, or step S7503, the present process ends.

  Next, a configuration related to the motion detection sensors ME8 to ME10 will be described. In the present embodiment, input detection to the operation detection sensors ME8 to ME10 provided in the game board 30 is in an effective state during the big hit state and during the probability change mode (excluding the reach state). That is, in the present embodiment, the character displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 performs an action (reacts) according to the detection by the action detection sensors ME8 to ME10 during the big hit state and the probability variation mode. ing. For example, when the detection is performed in the order of the motion detection sensors ME8 → ME10 → ME9 within a predetermined time, the character rotates when it turns round, or, for example, if the motion detection sensor ME9 continues to be detected for a predetermined time or more, the left side of the screen For example, when the character approaches or, for example, a play comes into a huge maze, the motion detection sensor ME8 corresponds to the right passage, the motion detection sensor ME9 corresponds to the left passage, and the motion detection sensor ME10 corresponds to the back passage. In addition, when the selection is performed three times, a result display corresponding to the selection may be performed.

  Next, configurations related to the motion detection sensors ME6 and ME7 will be described. In the present embodiment, when a game card with a balance is inserted or a bill is inserted in a card unit as a game assisting device arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, a game ball for such insertion is inserted. If the return button 122 is operated in a state where there is a balance without renting out all of the game cards, the gaming card with the balance is discharged from the card unit. In the present embodiment, the sub-control device 262 is configured to be able to grasp that a game card with a balance is inserted in the card unit. That is, the RAM 553 of the sub-control device 262 is provided with a balance storage area capable of storing the balance of the game card, and when the game card is inserted, a value corresponding to the balance is stored in the balance storage area via the external terminal board 240 or the like. When the rental is performed by the operation of the ball lending button 121, a value corresponding to the lending amount is subtracted from the balance storage area. In addition, when a card unit with a balance is ejected from the card unit, the value in the balance storage area is cleared.

  In the present embodiment, the detection of the motion detection sensor ME6 provided on the right side of the handle 18 and the motion detection sensor ME7 provided between the upper plate 19 and the lower plate 15 is performed every predetermined time. If it is determined that both of the detections are lost, that is, if it is determined that the player has left the seat, is there a balance of the game card with reference to the balance storage area? If the result is confirmed and an affirmative determination is made, forgetting to remove the game card is notified by the decorative symbol display device 42 or by voice. In this embodiment, the balance storage area, the function of storing the balance in the balance storage area, and the function of confirming the balance storage area when the player's absence is detected constitute the forgotten object detection means.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the player's absence is confirmed by the motion detection sensors ME6 and ME7, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation display is being performed. It should be noted that even if the next variable display is not yet started immediately after the variable display is stopped, it is considered that the variable display is in progress if there is a pending variable display. . If an affirmative determination is made in this determination, the state of the variable display is maintained from the time when the player's absence is confirmed (the variable display is not stopped and / or the variable display is made). The production accompanying the pause is paused). On the other hand, when the seating of the player is confirmed by the detection of the motion detection unit 451 or the like (the operation of the handle 18 is also possible) (for example, when the detection information (for a predetermined time or more) by the motion detection sensors ME6 and ME7 is input) Alternatively, after the detection of the motion detection sensors ME6 and ME7, when it is confirmed that the operation can be resumed by operating the effect button 125 or the like), the variable display is resumed (becomes advancing state). Has been.

  Note that the action effect and the button effect may be executed even in the big hit state, the probability variation mode, or the time reduction mode. That is, although it is actually a probable jackpot, the decorative symbol display device 42 has been taught such that it is not possible to determine whether the jackpot is a normal jackpot or a probable jackpot when displaying the variation (even-numbered blue eyes are displayed). If the derivation of the button effect of the pattern that succeeds during the jackpot state is determined, it may be a promising big hit by participating in the button effect (operating the effect button 125). Be taught. In addition, although it is actually the probability variation mode, it is taught that the probability variation mode is given during the variation display or the jackpot state in which the jackpot is taught in the decorative symbol display device 42 (that is, the probability variation jackpot). If it is determined that the derivation of the action effect of the pattern that succeeds in the time reduction mode is determined in appearance, participation in the action effect is taught to be in the probability variation mode. Of course, when not participating in these button effects and action effects, the opportunity to be taught that the probability change jackpot or probability change mode is taught by the button effects or action effects will be lost.

  As described above in detail, according to the present embodiment, in the vicinity of the effect button 125, the unit-side proximity detection sensor AE1 that can detect the player's hand close to the effect button 125 in an attempt to operate the effect button 125, and A frame side proximity detection sensor AE2 is provided. Therefore, it is possible to detect in advance that there is an operation on the effect button 125, and it is possible to perform an effect using the information. For example, based on the detection by the unit side proximity detection sensor AE1 and the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2, an effect related to the effect performed when the effect button 125 is operated before the effect button 125 is operated is performed. Or the mode of the effect button 125 itself can be changed (see step S7413 of the button effect execution process and step S7504 of the air effect execution process). Accordingly, it is possible to give a novel interesting to the operation on the effect button 125 and diversify the effect and game playability. As a result, it is possible to suppress a monotonous feeling of the game and to improve the interest.

  Furthermore, although the effect button 125 is not operated based on the detection information of the unit side proximity detection sensor AE1, the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2, and the operation detection sensor 427, there is a player's hand near the effect button 125. This information can be reflected in the production. In this example, the measurement time of the approach speed measurement timer that measures the time from the detection of both the unit side proximity detection sensor AE1 and the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2 to the detection of the operation detection sensor 427 is 0. There is provided a high-speed operation counter to which 1 is added when the time is less than 1 second, and a low-speed operation counter to which 1 is added when the time is 1 second or more, and according to such a count, that is, a hobby preference of the player The production can be derived.

  For example, in the case where the value of the low speed operation counter is equal to or greater than a predetermined value and the occurrence of the big hit state is determined, a predetermined time elapses after the player's hand starts waiting immediately above the effect button 125. Thus, at the timing when the light emission color of the effect button 125 is changed to red or rainbow, or when the value of the low speed operation counter is incremented by 1, the effect button 125 protrudes and comes into contact with the player's hand from the effect button 125 side. Or when the unit side proximity detection sensor AE1 and the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2 are not detected without pressing the performance button 125 even though the value of the low speed operation counter is incremented by 1, It is possible to derive a corresponding effect. Therefore, the player can realize that such a notification effect is derived (reflected) because of his / her operation, and can obtain a sense of fulfillment and achievement. As a result, the above-described effects such as diversification of production and game play are more reliably achieved.

  In addition, when the button effect for operating the effect button 125 is changed, the mode of the effect button 125 is changed (change in the light emission color, the protruding length of the operation unit 406, or the force required to push the operation unit 406), or the effect button 125. If the pachinko machine 10 decides the start timing of the prior production without permission, when the preliminary production that suggests the result according to the operation is performed, such timing may be compared with the operation timing of the production button 125. May be too early or too late. That is, if the timing of the pre-stage effect is too early, there is a concern that the player may be easily noticed, or that the interval with the operation of the effect button 125 will be too wide to rise. On the other hand, if the timing of the preliminary presentation is too late (for example, the preliminary presentation is started when the operation unit 406 is slightly touched), there is a concern that there will be no time delay for performing the preliminary presentation.

  On the other hand, such an inconvenience can be eliminated by causing the mode change to be executed slightly before the operation on the effect button 125 triggered by the detection of the unit side proximity detection sensor AE1 and the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2. Accordingly, the timing of the pre-production and the button production can be perfectly matched, and the player's feeling can be more reliably enhanced by such a series of flowing productions. Furthermore, when the button effect is derived but the player does not operate the effect button 125, it is possible to avoid performing the preliminary effect in vain. In particular, with regard to the air effect, it is necessary to control the opening and closing of the first valve 438 and the second valve 439 provided in the exhaust passage 432. Therefore, the opening and closing control is started before the operation of the effect button 125. The effect that the operation can be made in time for the operation of the button 125 becomes more remarkable.

  In the present embodiment, when the detection of both the unit side proximity detection sensor AE1 attached upward and the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2 attached forward is confirmed, It is detected as a close proximity of the player's hand. For this reason, it is possible to three-dimensionally detect a player's hand or the like approaching the effect button 125 to operate the effect button 125. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a player's operation that is not related to the operation on the effect button 125 is detected.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the effect button unit 120 is provided behind the storage recess 19 a on the upper surface side of the upper plate 19. For this reason, it takes when the player moves the game ball from the so-called dollar box or the lower plate 15 to the upper plate 19 by hand or takes out the game ball from the upper plate 19 when using a coffee service or the like. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the player's hand or the like performing the operation is detected by the unit side proximity detection sensor AE1. Accordingly, the unit-side proximity detection sensor AE1 and the frame-side proximity detection sensor AE2 detect an operation that is not related to the operation of the effect button 125, and an extra control regarding the operation of the effect button 125 is executed. It can suppress more reliably.

  In the present embodiment, action effects are performed using the motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5 and the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2 provided along the window portion 101 of the front frame set 14. Yes. That is, making the motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5 and the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2 detect the player's motion is an input operation for determining the pattern of the action effect (result effect indicating the end of the action effect). The motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5 that detect the player's motion and the detections of the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2 perform effects according to the combination and order. For this reason, the player's input operation itself can be made various, not all-inclusive, and the effects performed in response to the player's operation input can be made more diverse, and thus correspond to the player's actions. An effect can be derived, and an effect that the player can more easily empathize can be derived. Therefore, it is possible to give a novel interesting aspect regarding the input operation by the player, and to perform more various effects closer to the player. As a result, it is possible to suppress a monotonous feeling of the game and to improve the interest.

  Further, the motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5 and the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2 are arranged around the window portion 101 of the front frame set 14 that makes the game area visible from the front. For this reason, it is possible to perform a dynamic effect using the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 that has been used only for decoration or the like, and to provide a novel gameplay. .

  Furthermore, in action effects and button effects, not only does the result of the winning / failing lottery suggest during fluctuation display, but it also teaches decisively that it will be a big hit, or the action effects and buttons in the big win state or the probability change mode When the production is derived, it may be taught that the game is actually a probable big hit or a probable change mode. Thus, by participating in action production and button production, it is possible to obtain an opportunity (as soon as possible, many) to know information that the player wants to know. Thereby, participation in action production and button production can be promoted. Furthermore, because it is possible to give reasons for participation in action productions and button productions, it becomes easier for players to participate in such productions both externally and internally, and as a result, action production and button production itself You can get to know the fun of.

  In addition, the motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5 and the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2 that perform action effects and the motion detection sensors ME8 to ME9 that perform reaction effects correspond to the detection by these sensors being in an effective state. Then, a three-color LED 452 that is turned on or turned off in response to detection is provided. For this reason, the positions of the motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5, ME8 to ME9, and the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2 are suggested, the player is allowed to perform a predetermined action (implying the order of detection), the target It is possible to teach whether the detection is reliably performed by the motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5, ME8 to ME9, and the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2. Therefore, it is possible to greatly help the player to understand the effect using the motion detection unit 451.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, in a state where a game card with a balance is inserted in a card unit provided in the game hall at the pachinko machine 10, the detection of the motion detection sensors ME6 and ME7 causes the player to leave the seat. When confirmed, forgetting to remove the game card is notified by the decorative symbol display device 42 or voice. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting to take the game card. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the game card is taken away when the player leaves the seat in the toilet or the like. In addition, predetermined notification is performed only when the player leaves the seat using the detection information by the motion detection sensors ME6 and ME7. For this reason, when the game card is inserted into the card unit, it is possible to avoid an unpleasant situation where the user is always in a notification state.

  Further, when the player's absence is confirmed during the variable display by the motion detection sensors ME6 and ME7, the state of the variable display is maintained as it is. For this reason, when the user wants to go to a toilet or a cellular phone call during the change display, the user can leave the seat without worrying about the change display. Therefore, the convenience can be dramatically improved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, an exhaust passage 432 that communicates between the effect button 125, the back side outside of the pachinko machine 10, and the handle 18 is provided. When it is determined that an air effect is to be performed, when the operation unit 406 of the effect button 125 is pressed down, the air pushed out from the main body 405 is blown out from the vent hole 18b formed in the handle 18, or the pachinko machine 10 The air pump 440 provided in the first passage that is a branch passage that leads to the outside of the rear side of the camera is driven to supply the air of the effect button 125 to change the feeling of operating the effect button 125 (such as being difficult to push in). It has become. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the production effect, further improve the interest of the player, and to achieve the effect of diversifying the production more reliably.

  By the way, the air pump 440 is supplied to the effect button 125 to increase the amount of force required to push down the operation unit 406, or to intermittently supply air so as to vibrate when the operation unit 406 is pushed down. If the timing of the operation of the air pump 440 is too early, there is a concern that the player will notice the change of the effect button 125, and if the timing of the operation of the air pump 440 is too late, There is a concern that the supply of air may not be in time for the operation of the operation unit 406 of the player. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the air pump 440 is operated at a good timing just before the operation to the operation unit 406, triggered by the detection of the unit side proximity sensor AE1 and the frame side proximity sensor AE2. Therefore, such a problem can be eliminated.

  Furthermore, when execution of the air effect is determined, referring to the air effect selection table shown in FIG. 48, when the value of the air effect counter is “4 to 19”, the operation unit 406 is operated to produce The air pushed out from the main body 405 of the button 125 is blown out from the vent hole 18b of the handle 18, but when the value of the air effect counter is “0”, the air supplied from the air pump 440 is sent from the vent hole 18b. It will blow out. In this embodiment, the air pump 440 is driven by the detection of the unit-side proximity detection sensor AE1 and the frame-side proximity detection sensor AE2 (steps S7503 and S7504 in FIG. 44), so that air supplied from the air pump 440 is supplied. The timing of blowing out from the vent hole 18b is the timing just before the player operates the effect button 125. For this reason, in the configuration of this example, which often blows out from the handle 18 in response to the operation of the effect button 125, the player blows out air from the handle 18 even though the effect button 125 is not operated. On the other hand, a pleasant surprise (in this example, the wind comes out of the handle 18 only when a big hit is made) is memorized.

  In addition, it is not limited to the description content of embodiment mentioned above, For example, you may implement as follows.

  (A) In the above embodiment, the unit side proximity detection sensor AE1 and the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2 as proximity detection means are installed in the vicinity of the effect button 125 so that the player's hand close to the effect button 125 can be detected. However, the target operation means for installing the proximity detection means in the vicinity is not limited to the effect button 125, and the form and installation location of the operation means can be changed as appropriate. For example, the proximity detection means is configured by the motion detection sensor ME6 provided in the vicinity of the handle 18, and based on the detection of the motion detection sensor ME6, before the player's hand touches the handle 18, a predetermined effect (through) For example, the air may blow out from the pores 18b. Further, for example, when a touch sensor for detecting that a player's hand or the like is in proximity to the front of the decorative symbol display device 42 (the glass unit 137) is provided, the player's hand or the like in proximity to the touch sensor is provided. Proximity detection means may be installed so that detection is possible. A touch panel may be provided instead of or in addition to the effect button 125, and proximity detection means may be provided corresponding to the touch panel. Further, for example, in a slot machine that uses medals as game media, proximity detection means are provided for a start lever, stop button, bet button, effect buttons (push button, cross button, joystick, etc.), touch sensor, etc. You may arrange close.

  In order to operate the predetermined operation means, when a place where a player's hand or the like almost passes can be specified (a trajectory of an action approaching the predetermined operation means can be specified), the proximity detection means The proximity detection unit and the predetermined operation unit may be relatively separated from each other as long as they are installed at a specific place. For example, the sensitivity of the motion detection sensor ME5 installed in the lower left part of the window part 101 is configured to be adjustable, and an object to be touched with respect to the upper center of the window part 101, and to the object A touch sensor (operation means) for detecting the touch is installed. That is, since the player basically operates the handle 18 with the right hand, it is considered that the touch of the accessory is performed with the left hand, and the left hand is swung up to the upper center of the window 101. In this case, it is considered that a part of the left hand, the left arm and the like pass in front of the motion detection sensor ME5 (operates in front). Then, when it is determined to perform a predetermined performance triggered by the touch on the accessory, guidance for prompting the touch on the accessory is given and the sensitivity of the motion detection sensor ME5 is increased. In the case where it is determined, it is configured so that a dedicated light emission effect by the three-color LED 452 of the motion detection unit 451 or the annular illumination unit 102 is derived when the motion detection sensor ME5 is detected. May be.

  It should be noted that as the proximity detection means for detecting the operation to the operation means in advance is further away from the target operation means, the accuracy to “detect the action approaching the operation means in advance to try to operate the operation means”. That is, that is, the possibility of picking up other actions increases. In this respect, based on the proximity detection means and the situation at that time, for example, it is determined whether or not the operation to the operation means is an effective operation valid state. Whether the movement approaching the operation means is detected in an attempt to operate the operation means by checking the detection status or checking whether the operation is valid when the proximity detection means is detected. The accuracy (accuracy) can be improved. Also, the accuracy (accuracy) can be improved by adopting a configuration in which the operation approaching the operation unit is confirmed by the detection by the plurality of proximity detection units rather than the single proximity detection unit. it can.

  Furthermore, in the said embodiment, although the proximity detection means is comprised by two sensors, it may be comprised by one sensor and may be comprised by three or more sensors. Further, the number and arrangement of the motion detection sensors ME1 to ME10 are not particularly limited. In addition, the motion detection means is not limited to sensors such as the motion detection sensors ME1 to ME10. For example, the motion detection means is configured by a switch (push switch) that automatically returns to the original state even when operated. It is good as well.

  (B) In the said embodiment, the structure of the production | presentation button unit 120 is not specifically limited, A design change is possible suitably. For example, the main body 405 may be configured not to be displaced up and down. In addition, for example, a door member may be provided as an opening / closing means that closes the top of the effect button 125 and makes contact impossible. More specifically, for example, a pair of front and rear plate-like bodies that are substantially fan-shaped, a substantially circular arc-shaped cross-section that connects the substantially arc-shaped side portions of the pair of plate-like bodies, and each plate-like body Among them, a pair of door members provided with a pinion portion projecting from the side surface (front surface or rear surface) of the plate-like body at the corner portion separated from the closing panel is provided with respect to the housing 404, and the pair of door members is formed by a stepping motor. It may be configured to operate. In this case, it is possible to protect the rendering button 125 when not in use, to convey the operation timing (valid period) of the rendering button 125 in an easy-to-understand manner, or to cause the rendering button 125 to be visible or hidden. It can be improved. When the door member is closed, it is desirable to displace the main body 405 to the immersive position. In this case, an increase in the size of the effect button unit 120 can be suppressed.

  Moreover, when the door member is provided in the effect button unit 120, even if the opportunity to close the door member has come, the door member is closed in a state where the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2 is being detected. Furthermore, when the detection of the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2 is performed during the state change of the door member to the closed state, the closing operation may be interrupted. Good. As described above, by interlocking the detection of the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2 with the closing operation of the door member, it is possible to more reliably avoid a situation such as a player's hand being pinched by the door member.

  In addition, in the above embodiment, the main body 405 is displaced up and down by the stepping motor 407. However, the operation unit 406 is moved up and down by the stepping motor 407 without moving the main body 405 up and down. You may comprise so that it can do. In this case, for example, the operation unit 406 and the main body unit 405 move up and down integrally in accordance with the player's operation, and a part of the operation unit 406 or the main body unit 405 lowered by the pressing operation can be detected. As described above, an operation detection sensor 427 may be provided. For example, when the operation unit 406 can be directly moved up and down instead of the main body unit 405 by a stepping motor 407 (a solenoid or the like can be substituted) and the operation unit 406 is pressed. The shaft of the stepping motor 407 may be configured to follow and rotate. Further, as in the latter case, when the operation unit 406 is directly moved in and out by the driving means such as the stepping motor 407, it is determined that the operation unit 406 is to be immersed, and the proximity detection sensors AE1 and AE2 are detected. When the operation is performed, the stepping motor 407 may be configured to be able to displace the operation unit 406 downward to a position where the operation detection sensor 427 performs detection. In this case, it is possible to reliably derive an effect that is performed when the operation unit 406 is operated (switched on). Therefore, even if the player confused by the unexpected operation of the operation unit 406 that retracts before touching, and the player forgets to operate the operation unit 406 unexpectedly, the production corresponding to the operation of the production button 125 is surely performed. Can be derived. In addition, when such a configuration is employed, the detection of the operation detection sensor 427 is performed by driving a driving unit such as the stepping motor 407, and the operation detection sensor 427 is operated by the player operating the operation unit 406. When the detection is performed, that is, when the operation detection sensor 427 is detected in a state where the stepping motor 407 is not driven, the corresponding control performed based on the detection of the operation detection sensor 427 (selected effect) May be different. In this case, it is possible to further diversify and differentiate (weight) the effects. Further, when the operation unit 406 is immersed by driving means such as the stepping motor 407, the displacement to the position where further displacement toward the immersion position (operation position side) is restricted (bottomed out) is performed. It is good to be. In addition, the operation unit 406 in the immersed state may be entirely immersed from the upper surface of the surface (mounting base 403) of the effect button unit 120. In this case, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the operation unit 406 is struck by an excited player and the operation unit 406 is damaged.

  (C) In the above embodiment, a valve capable of adjusting the air flow rate is provided also for the passage before branching to the first passage 436 and the second passage 437 in the Y-shaped pipe 435 of the exhaust passage 432. Also good. In this case, the compressed air of the air pump 440 installed in the first passage 436 can be supplied to the handle 18 side without being supplied to the effect button 125 side. In this case, the air volume that can be supplied to the handle 18 can be finely adjusted, and the effect on the handle 18 using the air pump 440 is not only performed in conjunction with the effect on the effect button 125 using the air pump 440, but also separately. It is possible to diversify the production.

  In the above-described embodiment, there is a concern that the amount of air blown out from the vent hole 18b of the handle 18 will be small if the operation unit 406 is pushed down, and it may be difficult to notice. Therefore, a large or small pinion or rack is interposed. Thus, a configuration may be employed in which the amount of push-out of air toward the air vent 18b with respect to the amount of movement of the operation unit 406 is amplified.

  Further, the effect button 125 (the operation unit 406) may be configured to protrude by using the compressed air of the air pump 440. For example, when the operation unit 406 is not operated, the operation unit 406 is held by the coil spring 424 at a position where the operation unit 406 can be displaced both upward and downward, and air is relatively strongly supplied from the air pump 440. The operation unit 406 may be configured to be lifted upward by being supplied. In this case, the operation unit 406 can be protruded relatively quickly as compared with the case where the operation unit 406 is lifted and protruded together with the main body 405 by the stepping motor 407. In addition, when the configuration is adopted, not only the coil spring 424 that biases the operation unit 406 in the protruding direction in order to prevent the operation unit 406 from being lifted (attached to the player's hand and lifted together). A coil spring that biases the operation unit 406 in the immersion direction (the biasing force is weaker than the coil spring 424) may be provided. In this case, the operation unit 406 can be projected by supplying air from the air pump 440 to the effect button 125 stronger than the biasing force of the coil spring that urges the operation unit 406 in the immersion direction. By supplying air from the air pump 440 to the effect button 125 to the extent that it does not become stronger than the biasing force of the coil spring that biases the coil spring, it is possible to change the feel of the operation unit 406 operated without causing the operation unit 406 to protrude. it can.

  Further, the air pump 440 can be omitted, the structure in which the wind blows from the handle 18 can be omitted, or the exhaust passage 432 can be omitted. In addition, a pneumatic interlocking combination serving as an interlocking means operable with air pressure may be provided, and the pneumatic interlocking combination and the exhaust passage 432 may be communicated with each other. That is, instead of or in addition to the second passage 437 communicating with the handle 18, a branch (third passage) communicating with the pneumatic interlocking member and a third valve are provided, and the third valve, By appropriately adjusting and controlling the first and second valves 438 and 439, when the operation unit 406 is pressed, the pneumatic interlocking object may be interlocked or the pneumatic interlocking object may be moved by driving the air pump 440. It may be configured. Further, a soundproofing measure (for example, covering the housing) may be applied to the air pump 440 so that the driving of the air pump 440 is not easily recognized by the driving sound.

  In addition, in the above embodiment, by adjusting the opening degree of the first and second valves 438 and 439, the momentum (air volume) of the air blown from the vent hole 18b of the handle 18 is adjusted. More specifically, for example, inside the handle 18, a rotating disk is provided that can change the number of vent holes 18 b that are open to the outside of the plurality of vent holes 18 b. By changing the number of vent holes 18b to be opened, the strength of the air blown from the vent holes 18b may be adjustable.

  In addition, the usage example of the pipe provided with the branch is not particularly limited. For example, a Y-shaped pipe is installed immediately before a predetermined sound source, and a valve is provided at each branch of the Y-shaped pipe. You may comprise so that the sound volume output through can be performed. In addition, for example, when a whistle member such as a whistle that makes sound by the passage of air is installed in the pipe and the operation unit 406 is operated, the air pushed out from the effect button 125 passes through the whistle member so that sound is emitted. It may be configured. In addition, the wiring of the operation detection sensor 427 may be taken out of the main body 405 through the exhaust passage 432. In this case, it is possible to avoid separately forming a hole for passing the wiring in the main body portion 405, and the sealing performance can be improved.

  (D) In the above embodiment, there is a possibility that the button effect will be performed when the action effect is not performed, and when either the action effect or the button effect is performed at the time of the big hit or the probability change mode, And although it is comprised so that an air effect may be performed, it is not limited to such a structure in particular, A setting change is possible suitably.

  Furthermore, the contents of the effects using the unit side proximity detection sensor AE1, the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2, the motion detection sensors ME1 to ME10, the effect button 125, etc. are not particularly limited and can be set as appropriate. For example, in a configuration where a predetermined logo type is displayed in black and white on the decorative symbol display device 42 and a big hit state occurs when the logo type is repainted to a predetermined color triggered by the operation of the effect button 125, the unit side proximity You may comprise so that an effect display (for example, suggesting the expectation degree of jackpot generation | occurrence | production) may be performed around a logotype triggered by the detection by detection sensor AE1 and frame side proximity detection sensor AE2.

  In the above embodiment, the effect button 125 may protrude at the start of the button effect and at the timing when the detection by the unit-side proximity detection sensor AE1 and the frame-side proximity detection sensor AE2 disappears. That is, when performing an effect that causes the effect button 125 to protrude, the player's hand attempting to operate the effect button 125 at a relatively high speed and the main body 405 are displaced to the protruding position as in the above embodiment. It is desirable to set the timing such that the operation unit 406 of the effect button 125 does not touch (do not point).

  Moreover, the pattern of the mode change such as the operation of the effect button 125 is not particularly limited. For example, in the above-described embodiment, the effect button 125 may be protruded at the start of the button effect (see step S7208 in FIG. 41, FIG. 47), but the proximity detection sensor AE1 before the effect button 125 is protruded, And if it is determined whether or not there is detection of AE2, and if it is determined that there is detection of both proximity detection sensors AE1 and AE2, until the detection of either proximity detection sensor AE1 or AE2 is lost You may comprise so that protrusion of the button 125 may be made to wait. For example, when a dedicated flag is set in step S7208 and it is confirmed that the flag is set in the confirmation process performed every predetermined time, it is determined whether or not the proximity detection sensors AE1 and AE2 are detected. However, when an affirmative determination is made here, a command for actually projecting the effect button 125 may be output. In this case, a situation in which the player's hand approaching the effect button 125 and the operation portion 406 of the projecting effect button 125 collide at an unexpected angle can be avoided more reliably. However, the player's hand is stopped for a predetermined time at a position detected by both proximity detection sensors AE1 and AE2 (whichever is possible) above the effect button 125 to perform a predetermined effect (for example, a big hit or a probable change) When teaching the player that the mode is advantageous, the operation unit 406 protrudes or emits light. On the other hand, when the user teaches that the player is not preferable for the player, such as the disengagement, or the player is advantageous. For example, the operation unit 406 may be immersed or turned off. It should be noted that stopping the hand above the effect button 125 (operation unit 406) may or may not be in contact with the operation unit 406.

  Further, in the above embodiment, in the button effect, there is an effect of immersing the operation unit 406 of the effect button 125 when the proximity detection sensors AE1 and AE2 are detected, but the immersive operation unit 406 is at the original position. When returning, it is confirmed whether or not the detection of the proximity detection sensors AE1 and AE2 has been detected. If it is determined that neither detection has been detected, the stepping motor 407 is driven to move the main body 405. You may comprise so that it may be displaced to an upper reference position. In this case, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the operation unit 406 that protrudes and displaces and the player's hand come into contact. In the above embodiment, the effect button 125 is operated, the light emission color of the effect button 125 is changed, or the sensors are associated with detection of various sensors ME1 to ME5, AE1, AE2, and the like. In addition to those exemplified in the embodiment, the effect buttons 125 can be changed in various ways. For example, when the operating unit 406 is projected, the projecting speed is gradually decreased, or after a small amount of projection with blue light emission, the lamp is temporarily turned off and then returned to the reference position, and then greatly projected again with red light emission. However, when any of the detection sensors ME1 to ME5 selected internally is detected, the feel of the operation of the effect button 125 may be changed.

  (E) In the above embodiment, when the predetermined condition is satisfied and the detection inputs of the motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5 and the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2 are validated, the motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5 and the frame side proximity With the combination and order of detection of the detection sensor AE2 and the establishment of the predetermined condition, the motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5 and the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2 determined on the pachinko machine 10 side (sub-control device 262, etc.) When the combination and order match, a gaming state different from the case where they do not match may be given. For example, in the probability change mode or the time reduction mode, when a game ball passes through the through gate 34 (the detection of the through gate switch 225 is detected), a lottery is performed. The combination and the order of detection of the motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5 and the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2 are determined with reference to the navigation process indicating the combination and order (the motion detection sensors ME1 to which the detection order has arrived). When the detection input is completed, the lower winning opening 33b (opening / closing member 33c) of the start winning unit 33 is opened for a specified time. You may comprise. Of course, when the combination and order of the detection of the motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5 and the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2 detected and input by the player do not coincide with those determined on the pachinko machine 10 side, it is not opened. .

  In this example, the function of determining the combination and order of the motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5 and the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2 constitutes detection information internal determination means, and the motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5 and the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2 And a function for determining whether or not the combination and order of the actual detections of the motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5 and the detection by the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2 are the same constitute a match determination unit. To do.

  It should be noted that not only when the combination and order of the detection of the motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5 and the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2 are completely navigated, but also a part of navigation or no navigation, You may comprise so that a combination and order may be applied only by a person's feeling. Also, there is no particular limitation on the benefits when the combination and order of the motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5 and the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2 are the same, and 1) related to the acquisition of a game ball (the start winning unit described above) In addition to 33, the opening / closing type ball-throwing means that can change between an open state and a closed state, such as the variable prize-winning device 32, may be open), and 2) a state that is advantageous to the player May be granted the right to extend a certain period (time shortening mode, probability changing mode that ends when the number of fluctuations reaches the specified number of times), or 3) provided in the game area The movable combination is linked to change the flow of the game ball (for example, it becomes easier to enter the entrance 151 to the through gate 34 or the warp flow path 152, and accordingly, the corresponding lottery chance is easily obtained). like 4) Dedicated effects etc. may be derived in the decorative symbol display device 42, etc. 5) Game data is exchanged with the server via the portable communication terminal. Or 6) There are a plurality of open / close-type ball entry means such as the variable prize winning device 32 (lower prize winning opening 33b), for example. When a plurality of variable winning devices 32 are randomly opened, navigation may be performed as to which variable winning device 32 is opened. 7) For example, variable There may be a configuration in which there are a plurality of opening timings of the open / close-type pitching means such as the winning device 32 (the lower winning port 33b), and the timings may be navigated. 8) Suggestion of a staying game mode Or It may be configured so as to suggest settings, if any lot machine is carried out.

  (F) In the above embodiment, after the detection input operation to the operation detection unit 451 is completed in the action effect (the number of detections of the operation detection sensors ME1 to ME5 and the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2 has reached the detection input upper limit number). The result of the action effect is displayed by operating the effect button 125, but the action effect may be activated when the detection input operation is completed without performing the button operation. Moreover, in the said embodiment, when the detection input operation to the operation detection unit 451 is completed by action production, the combination of the operation detection sensors ME1 to ME5 and the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2 that are detected and input is displayed. It is good also as confirming whether this is good.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the detection information by the motion detection unit 451 is mainly reflected in the display effect in the decoration symbol display apparatus 42, it is visually recognizable to a player in a game area etc., for example. The movable combination is arranged so that the movable combination cannot be touched, and the movable combination operates according to the combination and order of detection of the motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5, ME8 to ME10, the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2, and the like. You may comprise. In this case, it is possible to derive a novel effect in which an accessory is displaced according to the player's action. In addition, for example, by determining the degree of displacement based on a combination of a plurality of motion detection sensors or the like, it is possible to perform a more complicated motion.

  (G) In the above embodiment, the movement detection sensors ME6 and ME7 are configured to be able to detect the player's absence. However, instead of or in addition to this configuration, the front surface that is the front surface side of the pachinko machine 10 A hook portion serving as a baggage custody portion that can hold the hand of the umbrella (the handle portion) with respect to any of the front surfaces of the frame set 14 is provided, and the hand of the umbrella hung on the hook portion is provided. It is good also as a thing left behind detection sensor as a thing left behind detection means which can detect. In the state where the forgotten object detection sensor is being detected, when a change from the player's gaming posture to the standing posture is detected by the motion detection sensor ME, a notification by a predetermined notification means (for example, a hook) The lamp provided exclusively in the vicinity of the unit emits light, the decorative symbol display device 42 announces forgotten things, or announces by voice, etc.). In this case, it is convenient to have a place for hanging an umbrella in the game hall, and it is possible to prevent the umbrella from being left behind. Further, the notification by the predetermined notification means is performed only when the player leaves the seat using the detection information by the motion detection sensor ME. For this reason, when the hook portion is used, it is possible to avoid an unpleasant situation in which the notification means is always in the notification state. Instead of or in addition to the hook portion for hanging the umbrella, a shelf portion is provided as a baggage custody portion on which another accessory carried by the player can be placed, and the forgotten item detection sensor is placed on the shelf portion. You may comprise so that it may detect.

  (H) In the above embodiment, when an effect using the motion detection sensors ME8 to ME10 (reaction effect in which a character or the like in the decorative symbol display device 42 reacts to the detection of the motion detection sensors ME8 to ME10) is performed. An operation speed measurement timer is provided as an operation speed measurement means for measuring the time from when a predetermined sensor is detected among the operation detection sensors ME8 to ME10 until another sensor is detected. It is determined whether or not the measurement time of the timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (the function for performing such determination constitutes the operation speed determination means), and is derived with reference to a different table according to the determination result It is good also as determining the production to be performed. In this case, the above-described effects such as production and diversification of playability can be achieved more reliably. It should be noted that an operation preference counter (operation preference counting means) that counts the result of determination of the measurement value by the operation speed measurement timer is provided, and an effect that reflects the player's movement tendency can be derived according to the count value Also good.

  (I) In the above-described embodiment, by operating the operation unit 406 to the operation position side, a piezoelectric unit having a piezoelectric body may be provided at a position pressed against the operation unit 406. In this case, for example, the operation of the operation unit 406 can be detected by a voltage generated by applying pressure to the piezoelectric unit. Therefore, energy for operating the effect button 125 can be used for detecting an operation on the effect button 125 without wasting energy. Further, for example, it is possible to generate a sound by applying a voltage that changes at a predetermined cycle to the piezoelectric means and vibrate the piezoelectric means, or to change the feeling of operating the operation unit 406. Note that electric power generated by electrically connecting the piezoelectric means and an electric device such as a lamp and operating the operation unit 406 many times may be used for the electric device. In addition, when it is desired to grasp that the operation unit 406 has been operated continuously for a predetermined period, use another detection means such as an optical sensor or an electric switch instead of the piezoelectric means, or use in combination. Is desirable.

  (J) The number and arrangement of the motion detection units 451 are not particularly limited, and can be installed as appropriate. For example, as the number of motion detection sensors ME is increased, the shift between the player's motion and the corresponding performance can be reduced as much as possible. That is, if there is a C point between the A point and the B point as the installation location of the motion detection sensor ME, whether the player's hand is located between the A point and the C point, It becomes possible to grasp whether it is located between. Therefore, it becomes easy to transfer emotions to the corresponding effects (for example, by using the reaction detection sensors ME8 to ME10 using the motion detection sensors ME8 to ME10 during the big hit state), and as a result, the interest is improved. be able to.

  Further, for example, the motion detection unit 451 may be configured to be able to recognize a motion that the player looks back and / or a motion that the player extends. Further, for example, in a state where the occurrence of a special gaming state is determined (but not notified to the player), the motion detection means detects an action of the player turning back or the player extending ( And winning in a dedicated lottery), and the generation of a special gaming state may be taught at that time. In this case, it is possible to increase opportunities for the player to experience the fun that the player's own actions and effects are linked to each other, so that the game can be tackled more actively.

  On the other hand, for example, while the player is looking away, the special gaming state of the special gaming state should not be missed so as not to miss the teaching of the special gaming state, which is the moment of joy for the player, or the announcement indicating the gaming method, etc. In the state where the occurrence has been determined (but not notified to the player), when the player turns back or the player stretches, when the motion is detected by the motion detection means, Alternatively, it may be configured not to derive a teaching or announcement of occurrence of a special gaming state.

  Furthermore, when a player's absence is confirmed by the motion detection unit 451 during the variation display that teaches the result of the predetermined lottery, the state of the variation display is maintained as it is from the point of confirmation (the variation display Changes when the player's seating is confirmed by detection of the motion detection unit 451 or the like (the operation of the handle 18 is also possible). It is good also as being comprised so that a display may be restarted (it will be in the state which advances). In this case, if the user wants to go to a toilet or a mobile phone call during the change display, the user can leave the seat without worrying about the change display. Therefore, the convenience can be dramatically improved.

  (K) In the above embodiment, when an action effect or a button effect is performed (for example, detection input by the operation detection sensors ME1 to ME5 and the frame side detection sensor AE2 even if a predetermined time has elapsed since the action effect was started) If there is no action effect, or the action effect is canceled by operating the effect button 125 before the detection by the motion detection sensors ME1 to ME5 and the frame side detection sensor AE2 reaches the detection input upper limit number after the action effect is started. In a possible configuration, when the cancel operation is performed), it is also possible to display a lineup of privileges granted by participating in action effects and button effects. In this case, it is possible to improve the willingness to participate in the production using the action production and the button production.

  (L) In the above embodiment, the jackpot probability, the number of jackpot types, the opening / closing pattern of the variable winning device 32 of various jackpot types are not particularly limited, and can be set as appropriate for each model. Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the winning probability in the winning lottery varies between the probability variation mode and the other modes, but the winning probability does not vary (is constant), and is given after the jackpot state ends. The above configuration may be applied to a pachinko machine in which a plurality of patterns of time reduction mode periods (number of fluctuations) are prepared.

  Further, in the above embodiment, a case where a big win is won based on the game ball entering the top winning opening 33a and a case where a big win is won based on the game ball entering the lower winning opening 33b, You may comprise so that the ratio of the jackpot classification provided may differ. For example, “7RN” is obtained when the jackpot is won based on the game ball entering the top winning port 33a and when the jackpot is won based on the game ball entering the bottom winning port 33b. Although the ratio is the same, the ratio of “16RS” (in other words, the ratio of “7RS”) may be different.

  (M) In the above embodiment, the hold of the variable display is taught to the player by the hold lamps 46a and 46b, but the hold may be taught by other display means. For example, in the decorative symbol display device 42, the image object that means the hold is displayed so as to know whether the hold of the first change display or the hold of the second change display is associated with the change display that is held on a one-to-one basis. May be.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the game ball enters the lower winning opening 33b held after the variation display (first variation display) based on the game ball entering the already won upper winning opening 33a. The second variation display is preferentially digested in such a way that the variation display based on the second variation display is digested before the first variation display so as to move around the reserved order. However, it may be configured to be digested in the reserved order regardless of the first variation display or the second variation display.

  (N) In the above embodiment, the main process (see FIG. 9) is followed by the main process (see FIG. 9), followed by the normal process (see FIG. 10). is not. For example, after step S111 of the main process, processing such as updating of the counter value performed in steps S209 to S218 of the normal process in the above embodiment is performed (step S210 is omitted), and is performed every 2 msec, for example. In the timer interrupt process, the process performed in steps S201 to S208 of the normal process in the above embodiment and the process of step S401 performed as the NMI interrupt process in the above embodiment may be performed. In this case, as the processing of step S401, for example, it is determined whether or not the power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501, and when the output of the power failure signal SK1 is confirmed, The flag which shows generation | occurrence | production of ON is turned on. Further, the processing in step S401 may be performed separately as NMI interrupt processing, as in the above embodiment.

  (O) In the above embodiment, the information indicating whether or not a jackpot state is generated is overwritten on the corresponding random number storage area for storing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1. It is not limited to. For example, a storage area for storing information on whether or not a big hit state occurs may be provided separately from the winning random number storage area for the execution area of each special variable holding area and each holding area. Separately from the area, an execution area of the special variable holding area and a storage area corresponding to each holding area may be provided, and information on whether or not a big hit state occurs in the storage area may be stored. In addition to the winning type random number storage area for storing the value of the type determination counter C2, a storage area for storing the jackpot type may be provided, or a reach random number storage area for storing the value of the variation selection counter C3; Separately, a storage area for storing reach information may be provided.

  (P) You may implement as a type of pachinko machine different from the said embodiment. For example, movable means that can be changed between a specific area in which a game ball moving in the game area can enter, an open state that allows entry into the specific area, and a closed state that prohibits entry into the specific area ( Variable entry means comprising wing members), specific entry means and non-specific entry means capable of entering a game ball entering a specific area, and detection of a game ball entering the specific entry means Specific entry detection means (condition establishment detection means) that performs, a start entry means that is provided outside the specific area and can enter a game ball that moves in the game area, and a game ball that has entered the start entry means And a main control means for controlling opening and closing of the variable pitching means, and when a game ball enters a specific area, the game ball is not specified and non-specific. Regardless of which ball you enter, a predetermined number of game values (game balls) will be given to the player The main control means, based on the detection of the starting entrance detection means, the small hit state in which the variable entrance means is opened once or a plurality of times for the first time, or the variable entrance means is the first Whether or not to generate a jackpot state in which a predetermined number of game balls are placed in the open state for a second time longer than the time, or a predetermined number of game balls are entered in the open variable winning means. If you win a lottery in the winning lottery, a small hit state will be generated, if you win a big hit in the lottery lottery, and if there is a detection of specific entry detection means May be applied to a gaming machine that generates a jackpot state. In this case, the variable pitching means corresponds to a variable winning device. In addition to pachinko machines, various ball games, similar game machines such as sparrow balls, slot machines as revolving game machines, and game machines that combine slot machines and pachinko machines May be.

  (Q) Further, a proximity sensor as a proximity detecting means may be provided corresponding to each stop button of a slot machine that plays a game using a medal as a game medium. That is, in recent years, when a winning child role is established by operating the stop buttons in a specific order, the state of navigating the operation order (push order) of the stop buttons (so-called assist time or assist replay time) Etc.) are set. In this case, a predetermined number of medals can be obtained by operating the stop buttons in the navigated order. However, if the stop buttons are operated in a different order from the navigated order, the medals cannot be obtained. However, depending on the model, the state of navigating the pressing order may be interrupted or terminated. In addition, in some models, the order in which the stop buttons are pressed is specified even during normal times. If the stop buttons are operated in an order that violates this specification, bonuses, assist replay time, etc. It will be in a disadvantageous state for the player, such as the fact that the lottery is not performed.

  In this regard, by providing a proximity sensor corresponding to each stop button individually, if it is likely that the stop button will be operated in the wrong order, a warning sound or warning display can be derived in advance. Mistakes can be avoided. Further, the proximity detection sensor may be provided directly behind the stop button. More specifically, the operation unit of the stop button that appears in front and back and the proximity sensor are unitized, and the proximity sensor detects a player's finger approaching to operate the stop button through the operation surface of the operation unit. You may comprise as follows. In this case, it is possible to reduce a situation in which an operation different from the operation to the corresponding stop button is detected as compared with a case where a proximity sensor is installed at the peripheral portion of the stop button.

  (R) In the above embodiment, wind may blow out from the vent hole 18b of the handle 18 mechanically linked (linked) to the displacement of the operation unit 406 of the effect button 125. There is no particular limitation on the configuration to be interlocked with each other, and other components may be mechanically interlocked. Hereinafter, an example of an interlocking mechanism that interlocks with the effect button 125 will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 and 50.

  As shown in FIG. 49, with respect to a position (and a non-contactable position) visible from the player on the front side of the pachinko machine 10, a first movable accessory (可 動) 801 as interlocking means, and a second A movable accessory (turtle) 802 is provided. A first role interlocking gear 803 as a first interlocking member that interlocks with the first movable accessory 801 and a second accessory interlocking gear 804 as a second interlocking member that interlocks with the second movable accessory 802 are provided. ing. In addition, a driven gear 805 that is linked to the operation unit 406 of the effect button 125 is provided, and the power generated by the displacement of the operation unit 406 that is transmitted via the driven gear 805 is used as the first and second combination gears 803 and 804. A transmission member 806 capable of transmitting to is provided.

  The transmission member 806 includes a main pinion 807 engaged with the driven gear 805, a first transmission pinion 808 engaged with the first accessory interlocking gear 803, and the first transmission pinion 808 sandwiching the main pinion 807. A central portion (rotation center) of the second transmission pinion 809 disposed on the opposite side and meshed with the second accessory interlocking gear 804, the main pinion 807, the first transmission pinion 808, and the second transmission pinion 809. And a cylindrical shaft portion 810 that connects between them.

  49 and 50, an arm member 821 having a pair of bearing portions 822 that rotatably supports a pair of shaft portions 810 of the transmission member 806 is provided, and the arm member 821 is transmitted as described above. A first motor 823 that moves the member 806 up and down and a second motor (not shown) that moves the arm member 821 left and right together with the transmission member 806 and the first motor 823 are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 49, in this embodiment, the distance between the first accessory interlocking gear 803 and the second accessory interlocking gear 804 is the distance between the first transmission pinion 808 and the second transmission pinion 809. The driven gear 805 is shorter and thicker than the main pinion 807. With such a configuration, the transmission member 806 meshes with the driven gear 805 and the main pinion 807, and meshes with the first accessory interlocking gear 803 and the first transmission pinion 808 (the second accessory interlocking gear 804 and the second interlocking gear). The first transmission position, which is not meshed with the transmission pinion 809, and the driven gear 805 and the main pinion 807 mesh with each other, and the second accessory interlocking gear 804 and the second transmission pinion 809 mesh with each other (the first accessory interlocking gear 803). And the first transmission pinion 808 are configured so as to be displaceable to a second transmission position. When the transmission member 806 is in the first transmission position, when the operation unit 406 is pressed, the first movable accessory (役) 801 is interlocked, and when the transmission member 806 is in the second transmission position, When the operation unit 406 is pressed, the second movable accessory (turtle) 802 is interlocked.

  Further, the transmission member 806 of the present embodiment is positioned below the first transmission position and the second transmission position, and the power generated by the displacement of the operation unit 406 is transmitted to the first and second combination gears 803 and 804. It can also be displaced to a retracted position that does not transmit to either. In this example, in a state where the normal button effect is not performed, the transmission member 806 is held at the retracted position and is also temporarily retracted between the first transmission position and the second transmission position. Is going to go through. The state where the transmission member 806 is in the first transmission position corresponds to the first interlocking state, and the state where it is in the second transmission position corresponds to the second interlocking state. However, the state in which the transmission member 806 is in the first transmission position or the second transmission position may correspond to the second interlocking state, and the state in which the transmission member 806 is in the retracted position may correspond to the first interlocking state. The arm member 821, the first motor 823, and the second motor (and the sub-control device 263 that controls these motors) constitute transmission operation means, and these and the transmission member 806 constitute object switching means.

  Further, in this example, when it is determined that the transmission member 806 is displaced to the first transmission position or the second transmission position, the transmission member 806 is triggered by the detection by the unit side proximity detection sensor AE1 as the first transmission position or the second transmission position. It is displaced to the second transmission position. In addition, when the first movable combination 801 and the second movable combination 802 are not linked, the expectation for occurrence of the big hit state is higher than when the first movable combination 801 is linked, and the second movable combination is higher than the first movable combination 801 is linked. Correspondence is made so that the combination of the accessory 802 has a higher expectation for occurrence of the jackpot state. In this example, the displacement of the transmission member 806 starts only when the unit side proximity detection sensor AE1 is detected, but only when the frame side proximity detection sensor AE2 is detected or the proximity detection sensors AE1 and AE2 are detected. It is good also as a structure which the displacement of the transmission member 806 starts only by having detected either one, and if it is the structure which can perform a meshing shift more rapidly, both detection of proximity | contact detection sensor AE1 and AE2 will be carried out. It is good also as a required structure.

  In addition, in this example, the first independent motor 801 and the second movable accessory 802 are not linked to the operation of the operation unit 402 but can be operated independently, respectively. 831 and a second independent motor 832 are provided. The first independent motor 831 and the second independent motor 832 are used, for example, at the stage before the player operates the operation unit 406, triggered by detection of the proximity detection sensors AE1 and AE2, for example. An effect such as driving the 831 or the second independent motor 832 to surprise the player is performed.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the player simply operates the operation unit 406 of the effect button 125 in the same manner, and the target interlocked with the operation (the first movable accessory 801 and the second movable accessory 802). ) Can be enjoyed. Therefore, it is possible to give a novel interesting to the operation of the effect button 125 without bothering the player's hand, and to diversify the effect and game playability. As a result, it is possible to suppress a monotonous feeling of the game and to improve the interest.

  In addition, when the operation timing of the first motor 823 or the second motor is too early with respect to the timing when the player operates the operation unit 406, the driving sound of the first motor 823 or the second motor is easily noticed. The arm member 821 and the transmission member 806 are displaced by driving the first motor 823 and the second motor, but the switching operation is wasted because the player did not operate the operation unit 406. There is concern. On the other hand, when the operation start timing of the first motor 823 or the second motor is too late, there is a concern that the timing of the operation of the operation unit 406 by the player may not be in time. On the other hand, according to this example, the first motor 823 and the second motor are started to be driven at a timing just before the operation of the operation unit 406 is performed with the detection of the unit side proximity detection sensor AE1. And the above concerns can be dispelled.

  Furthermore, in this example, a first independent motor 831 and a second independent motor 832 that can operate the first movable accessory 801 and the second movable accessory 802 without being interlocked with the operation of the operation unit 406 are provided. In addition, the first independent motor 831 and the second independent motor 832 start to be driven by the detection of the proximity detection sensors AE1 and AE2. Accordingly, the first movable combination 801 and the second movable combination 802 can be started not only at a timing triggered by an operation on the operation unit 406 but also at a timing just before the operation unit 406 is operated. Therefore, it is possible to increase the variation when the operation unit 406 is operated to break down the mannerism, and to expect the occurrence of a big hit state advantageous to the player, the first movable accessory 801, the second movable accessory Correspondence with the timing at which 802 operates can improve game play.

  When the player operates the operation unit 406 with the transmission member 806 displaced from the retracted position to the first transmission position (detection of the operation detection sensor 427), the transmission member 806 is performed. May be configured to return to the retracted position, to stand by at the first transmission position, and to be displaced to the second transmission position. In this case, when the operation unit 406 is operated again after releasing the hand from the operation unit 406, a difference occurs between the first movable combination 801 and the second movable combination 802 that are linked. Accordingly, the variation when the operation unit 406 is operated can be increased, the degree of expectation for the occurrence of the big hit state, and whether or not the first movable accessory 801 and the second movable accessory 802 to be linked change. Correspondingly, the gameability can be improved.

[Appendix]
The technical idea that can be grasped from the above embodiment will be described below.

Means A-1. Operation means provided at a position operable by the player;
Operation detecting means for detecting an operation on the operating means;
A game machine, comprising: proximity detection means capable of detecting an operation to operate the operation means.

  According to the means A-1, since it is possible to detect in advance that there is an operation on the operation means, it is possible to perform an effect using the information. For example, based on the detection by the proximity detection means, before performing the operation of the operation means, an effect related to the effect performed when there is an operation of the operation means is performed, or the aspect of the operation means itself is changed. be able to. In addition, for example, based on the detection information of the proximity detection means and the operation detection means, it is possible to grasp that the player's hand is present near the operation means although the operation means is not operated. You can expand the production. Therefore, it is possible to give a novel interestingness to the operation of the operation means and diversify the production and the playability. As a result, it is possible to suppress a monotonous feeling of the game and to improve the interest.

  In addition, in the case of an operation effect for operating the operation means, when a prior effect that changes the mode of the operation means or suggests a result according to the operation of the operation means is performed, the game machine starts such a prior effect start timing. May be determined too early or too late with respect to the operation timing of the operation means. That is, there is a concern that if the timing of the pre-production is too early, the player may be easily noticed, or the interval from the operation of the operation means will be too wide to rise. On the other hand, if the timing of the preliminary presentation is too late (for example, the preliminary presentation is started when the operation means is slightly touched), there is a concern that there will be no time delay for performing the preliminary presentation at all. On the other hand, such an inconvenience can be eliminated by causing the mode change to be executed slightly before the operation to the operation unit triggered by the detection of the proximity detection unit. Therefore, the timings of the pre-production and the operation presentation can be perfectly matched, and the player's feelings can be more reliably enhanced by such a series of flowing presentations. Furthermore, although the operation effect for operating the operation means has been derived, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the pre-effect is performed wastefully when the player does not operate the operation means.

  As an effect related to the effect performed when the operation unit is operated before the operation unit is operated based on the detection by the proximity detection unit, for example, a predetermined logo type is displayed on a predetermined display device. In a configuration in which a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player occurs when the logo type is displayed in black and white and triggered by the operation of the operation means, the logo type is triggered by detection by the proximity detection means. You may comprise so that an effect display may be performed around a type. Further, when a mechanical state change that is relatively time-consuming than an electrical state change (image switching or the like) is performed according to the operation of the operation unit, the mechanical state is detected based on the detection of the proximity detection unit. It may be configured to be able to execute a state change in advance. In this case, the mechanical state change can be made in time during the operation of the operation means, and an effect that combines the mechanical state change during the operation of the operation means can be executed. In addition, according to the detection of the proximity detection unit, after the detection of the proximity detection unit is performed, the operation unit is not operated at a stage where the operation detection unit is not detected. It is good also as being comprised so that change is possible. In this case, for example, the operation unit operated by the player among the operation means is configured so that it can be moved in and out without being operated, and when the proximity detection means is detected, before the player touches the operation means, The operating means may be configured to protrude from the reference position or retract from the reference position. Furthermore, for example, when the operation means has a built-in light emitting means, and at least a part of the operation means is made of a transparent or translucent material capable of transmitting the light of the light emitting means, and there is detection by the proximity detection means, The light emitting means may be configured to emit light in a predetermined manner before the player touches the operation means. Also, the light emitting means may include a plurality of light sources, or may include a driving means such as a motor so that the light emitting means can be displaced such as rotating.

  As the operation means, in the case of a pachinko machine, for example, a presentation button, a touch sensor, a handle, or the like that changes the display content of a predetermined display device according to an operation or plays a predetermined sound. In the case of a slot machine, there are a bet button for betting a credited medal, a stop button, an effect button, a touch sensor, a start lever, and the like. The proximity detection means may generally be a player's hand that approaches (closes to) the operation means in order to operate the operation means, but naturally other things (for example, games) The elbow of the player, the plastic bottle held by the player, etc.).

  Means A-2. The proximity detection means is composed of at least two sensors attached in different directions, and when the plurality of sensors constituting the proximity detection means are simultaneously detected, the proximity detection means has detected. The gaming machine according to means A-1, wherein

  According to the means A-2, it is possible to three-dimensionally detect a player's hand or the like approaching the operation means to operate the operation means. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a player's motion unrelated to the operation on the operation means is detected.

Means A-3. An operation speed measuring means for measuring a time from when the proximity detecting means is detected until an operation to the operating means is detected;
The gaming machine according to means A-1 or A-2, further comprising operation speed determination means for determining whether or not a time measured by the operation speed measurement means is equal to or longer than a first time.

  According to the means A-3, different effects are derived when the time measured by the operation speed measuring means is greater than or equal to the first time and less than the first time (refer to different tables when determining the effect type). It can be constituted as follows. Therefore, the above-described effects such as production and diversification of the game performance can be achieved more reliably.

  In addition, an operation time measurement unit that measures the time during which the operation detection unit is continuously detected is provided, and when the effect is determined based on the operation of the operation unit, the measurement time by the operation time measurement unit is determined in advance. It is possible to determine whether or not it is longer than the predetermined time and determine the effect according to the determination result.

  Means A-4. Operation preference for counting the number of times that the measurement time by the operation speed measurement means is equal to or longer than the first time and / or the number of times that the measurement time by the operation speed measurement means is less than the first time. A gaming machine according to means A-3, comprising a counting means.

  According to the means A-4, by confirming the count value of the operation preference counting means, it is possible to grasp the tendency of the player's operation method to the operation means, that is, the player's hobby preference regarding the operation of the operation means. The hobby preference can be reflected in the production related to the operation of the operation means. For example, in the case where the operation preference count means is the first number or more, that is, for a player who operates the operation means after waiting for a predetermined time in the vicinity of the operation means before operating the operation means, A state in which the occurrence of a special gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, jackpot state, probability change mode, time reduction mode, bonus, assist replay time) has been determined (however, the special gaming state has not yet started and teaching In the state of not being operated), as described above, by operating the operating means after waiting for a predetermined time in the vicinity of the operating means before operating the operating means, the occurrence of the special gaming state is quickly taught. It can also be configured as follows. As a result, the player can realize that such a notification effect is derived (reflected) just because of his own operation, and can obtain a sense of fulfillment and achievement. .

Means A-5. A plurality of motion detection means capable of detecting a player's motion;
An operation storage area capable of storing a combination (and order) of the detection of the operation detection means,
(The motion detection means includes the proximity detection means.)
When a predetermined condition is established, when determining an effect performed based on the detection of the operation detection means, the storage information in the motion storage area is taken into account, and the effect is determined according to the storage information in the motion storage area. A gaming machine according to any one of means A-1 to A-4.

  According to the means A-5, causing the action detection means to detect the player's action is an input operation for determining the effect pattern to be performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the action of the player An effect corresponding to the combination (and order) of the detection of the motion detection means that detects the above is executed. For this reason, the player's input operation itself can be made various, not all-inclusive, and the effects performed in response to the player's operation input can be made more diverse, and thus correspond to the player's actions. Since the effect can be derived, it is possible to derive the effect that the player can more easily empathize with. Therefore, it is possible to give a novel interesting aspect regarding the input operation by the player, and to perform more various effects closer to the player. As a result, it is possible to suppress a monotonous feeling of the game and to improve the interest. Examples of the “production corresponding to the player's action” include, for example, that the character performs the same action as the player on the display device, or the reaction to the player's action.

  In addition, the arrangement of the motion detection means is relatively free, and by using the motion detection means scattered throughout the front of the gaming machine, an area that was conventionally only used for decoration or the like was also used. It is possible to perform a dynamic production using the full front of the gaming machine, and to provide novel gaming characteristics.

  Means A-6. A gaming machine according to means A-5, wherein a light emitting means is provided corresponding to each of the motion detecting means.

  According to the means A-6, the position of the motion detection means is suggested, a predetermined action is taken (implying the order of detection), or whether the detection is surely performed by the target motion detection means is taught. It becomes possible to do. Therefore, it is possible to greatly help the player to understand the effect using the motion detection means.

Means A-7. A detection information internal determination unit that determines a combination (and order) of detection of the operation detection unit when a condition that enables detection information by the operation detection unit to be stored in the operation storage area is satisfied;
The detection combination (and order) of the motion detection means stored in the motion storage area matches the detection combination (and order) of the motion detection means determined by the detection information internal determination means. A match determining means for determining whether or not
When the affirmative determination is made by the coincidence determination means, processing different from the case where a negative determination is made is executed. The gaming machine according to means A-5 or A-6,

  According to the means A-7, the playability using the motion detection means can be further improved.

Means A-8. The motion detection means is arranged so as to be able to identify the absence of the player who sits in front of the gaming machine and plays the game,
When a player's absence is confirmed by the motion detection means during a teaching effect (variation display) that teaches the result of a predetermined lottery, the current state of the teaching effect is maintained from the point of confirmation ( (The variable display is not stopped and / or the effect accompanying the variable display is paused)
The teaching effect is resumed (becomes advancing) when the player's seating is confirmed (by detection of the motion detection means, operation of an operation means operable by the player, etc.). A gaming machine according to any one of means A-5 to A-7.

  According to the means A-8, when the user wants to go to a toilet or a cellular phone call during the teaching effect (variation display), the user can leave the seat without worrying about the teaching effect. Therefore, the convenience can be dramatically improved.

  In addition, “the motion detection means is arranged so as to be able to identify the motion of the player to look back and / or the motion of the player to extend, and during the teaching effect (variation display) that teaches the result of the predetermined lottery, If the motion detection means confirms the player's turn-back action or the player's extension action, the current state of the teaching effect is maintained and the player's posture is returned from the point of confirmation. It may be configured that the teaching effect is resumed when it is confirmed. In this case, while the player is looking away, he / she misses an announcement of a special gaming state that is a moment of joy for the player, an announcement of a game method, etc. (disadvantageous to the player if missed) The situation can be avoided.

  Means A-9. The motion detection means is arranged so as to be able to identify the motion that the player looks back and / or the motion that the player stretches, and the motion detection during the teaching effect (variation display) that teaches the result of a predetermined lottery When an action that the player looks back by means or an action that the player stretches is confirmed, there is a case where a definite suggestion effect indicating the result of the teaching effect is performed even though the teaching effect is being performed. A gaming machine according to any one of means A-5 to A-8.

  According to the means A-9, it is possible to increase the opportunities for the player to experience the fun that the player's own actions and effects are linked to each other, so that the game can be tackled more actively.

Means A-10. An operation speed measuring means for measuring a time from when the predetermined motion detection means is detected until another motion detection means is detected;
The game according to any one of means A-5 to A-9, further comprising operation speed discrimination means for discriminating whether or not the time measured by the operation speed measurement means is equal to or longer than a second time. Machine.

  According to the means A-10, different effects are derived when the time measured by the operation speed measuring means is equal to or longer than the second time and when it is less than the second time (refer to different tables when determining the effect type). It can be constituted as follows. Therefore, the above-described effects such as production and diversification of the game performance can be achieved more reliably.

  In addition, “the number of times that the measurement time by the operation speed measurement unit is equal to or longer than the second time or / and the number of times that the measurement time by the operation speed measurement unit is less than the second time is counted. It is good also as providing the operation preference count means to perform. In this case, by confirming the count value of the action preference counting means, the player's movement tendency can be grasped, and such tendency can be reflected in effects and the like.

Means A-11. The player's baggage is left in the baggage storage section where the player can carry or lock the baggage carried by the player, and / or a gaming machine or a gaming assist device (card) adjacent to the gaming machine Unit, etc.), and stores the number of game values possessed by the player, and includes forgotten thing detection means for detecting that the player has left a portable storage medium,
In the state in which the forgotten object detection means is being detected, the player's leaving motion (for example, a change from a gaming posture to a standing posture or disappearing from the front of the gaming machine) is detected by the motion detection means. The gaming machine according to any one of means A-5 to A-10, in which a notification by a predetermined notification means is performed.

  According to the means A-11, it is possible to prevent the player from leaving the baggage. Further, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the storage medium is taken away when the player leaves the seat in the toilet or the like. Further, in this means, the notification by the predetermined notification means is performed only when the player leaves the seat using the detection information by the motion detection means. For this reason, if the baggage depositing unit is used or the storage medium is inserted into the game assisting device, it is possible to avoid an unpleasant situation where the notification means is always in the notification state. In addition, if there is a baggage custody part, a place where an umbrella or a cigarette can be placed in a gaming machine is convenient.

  Means A-12. When a predetermined condition is established and it is determined that a predetermined process is to be executed, when a player participates in an effect performed based on detection by the motion detection means, In comparison, the gaming machine according to any one of means A-5 to A-11, characterized in that the player may be taught at an earlier timing that the predetermined process is executed.

  According to the means A-12, participation in the production performed based on the detection of the action detection means can be promoted. Furthermore, since it is possible to give a reason for participation in the production performed based on the detection of the motion detection means, it becomes easier for the player to participate in such production both externally and internally, It is possible to know the fun of the presentation performed based on the detection of the motion detection means.

  In addition, “It is a configuration that is given or given by participating in the production using the motion detection means, and is given when the production is performed using the motion detection means. It is good also as "displaying the lineup of the privilege to be performed". Even in this case, it is possible to improve the willingness to participate in the production using the motion detection means.

Means A-13. In a configuration in which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out by the payout means when the game balls win the winning means provided in the game area where the game balls launched by the shooting means are guided,
A storage supply portion in which a storage concave portion for storing the game ball paid out from the payout means and guiding the stored game ball toward the launching means side is formed,
The gaming machine according to any one of means A-1 to A-12, wherein the operation means and the proximity detection means are arranged behind the storage recess.

  According to the means A-13, the player manually supplies the game ball to the storage supply unit (transfers the game ball from the so-called dollar box or lower plate to the upper plate as the storage supply unit), or from the storage supply unit to the game When a ball is taken out (a game ball is taken out from the upper plate as a storage supply unit when using a coffee service or the like), the player's hand performing such an operation is detected by the proximity detection means. Such a situation can be suppressed. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the proximity detection unit detects an operation unrelated to the operation unit and the control related to the operation of the operation unit is executed.

Means A-14. The operation means includes
An operation unit that is provided so as to be relatively displaceable with respect to the front portion of the gaming machine, and that is displaced between an operation position when operated and a non-operation position when not operated;
Urging means for urging the operation portion toward the non-operation position side,
The game machine according to any one of means A-1 to A-13, wherein the operation detection means detects that the operation portion has been displaced to the operation position.

  The operation means includes a light-emitting means, and at least a part of the operation unit has translucency so that light from the light-emitting means can be transmitted to the outside of the operation means. It is good.

  Means A-15. The operating means changes the magnitude of the stress acting on the operating portion when operating the operating portion at the non-operating position to displace the operating portion toward the operating position (to the non-operating position). Means A-14 characterized by comprising an operating force adjusting means capable of operating a certain operating part to change the magnitude of the force required to displace the operating part to the operating position side The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the means A-15, the stress acting on the operation part when the operation part is displaced toward the operation position can be changed by the operation force adjusting means. For this reason, it is possible to obtain a novel operation means in which the feeling when the player operates the operation unit changes. Therefore, by mounting the operation means on the gaming machine, it is possible to enhance the production effect and further enhance the interest for the player.

  In addition, since a novel phenomenon as described above (change in feel when operating the operation unit) can occur in the operation means that the player has been less interested in, conventionally, the player has a fresh surprise, Interested in the operation means itself. As a result, a dramatic improvement in interest can be achieved. Furthermore, it is possible to perform an effect (such as suggestion or teaching of various game states) using a change in feel when the operation unit is operated, and the possibility of an effect that can be performed on the gaming machine can be expanded.

Means A-16. A first passage for discharging the air pushed out by the operation unit to the back side of the gaming machine when the operation unit is operated and displaced to the operation position;
A second passage for discharging the air pushed out by the operation unit to the front side of the gaming machine;
Among the air pushed out by the operation unit, the flow rate changing means is provided that can change the ratio of the amount of air guided to the first passage and the amount of air guided to the second passage. A gaming machine according to the feature A-14 or A-15.

  According to the means A-16, when the player operates the operation unit, it is possible to produce an effect that air blows out to the front side of the gaming machine in which the player is present. In addition, the amount of blowout can be adjusted, and the performance can be improved. It should be noted that “the second guide passage is configured so that the discharged air can be blown to the player so that the player can experience the air blown out more reliably. It may be "being". For example, the second guide passage may be communicated with the operating means or the peripheral portion thereof, and air may be blown by the operation of the operating means to the hand operating the operating means.

  In addition, regarding the means A-15, “an air pump that sends air to the operating means via the first passage” may be provided. By adopting this configuration, it is possible to change the force required to operate the operation unit, or to vibrate the operation unit (send air intermittently at a rapid pitch). Furthermore, “the air pump may be operated at a timing triggered by the detection of the proximity detection unit”. That is, if the operation timing of the air pump is too early, there is a concern that the player will notice the change of the operation means, and if the operation timing of the air pump is too late, the supply of air is There is concern about not being in time for the operation. On the other hand, such an inconvenience can be eliminated by operating the air pump slightly before the operation to the operation unit triggered by the detection of the proximity detection means.

Means A-17. The operation means includes
A main body portion that is provided so as to be relatively displaceable with respect to the front surface portion of the gaming machine and that supports the operation portion so as to be relatively displaceable;
Drive means capable of driving the main body part in both directions on the operation position side and the non-operation position side along the displacement direction of the operation part;
Any one of means A-14 to A-16, wherein when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the drive means drives the main body based on detection information of the proximity detection means and the operation detection means. The gaming machine described.

  According to the means A-17, it is possible to obtain an operation means from which a novel mode in which the operation portion is displaced is derived based on the detection information of the proximity detection means and the operation detection means. For example, triggered by the detection of the proximity detection means, the drive means drives the main body part to the non-operation position side, and an effect by the operation means that causes the operation part to escape even if the player tries to operate the operation part is performed. Can do. Furthermore, for example, when the state of the proximity detection unit and the detection of the operation detection unit is changed to a state where the detection of the operation detection unit is performed, the drive unit moves the main body to the operation position side. It is possible to produce an effect by operating means such that the player has released his hand from the operation unit but has not left.

  Means A-18. When the main body is driven by the driving means, the operating state of the operating unit at the non-operating position protrudes outward from the front part of the gaming machine, and the operating surface of the operating unit is The gaming machine according to means A-17, wherein the gaming machine is configured to be changeable to a housed state housed inside the front portion of the gaming machine.

  According to the means A-18, the effect of the operation means using the displacement of the main body can be performed more dynamically. Further, by setting the operation unit in the housed state, it is possible to make it difficult to operate the operation unit. For example, it is difficult to perform an action such as slamming the operation unit with a palm or a grasped hand. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player's excessive operation to the operation unit (suppress the act of slamming the operation unit), and the operation means is deteriorated early or damaged. Can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, since the operation surface of the operation portion protrudes outward from the front surface portion of the gaming machine by setting the operation portion to the protruding state, the operation portion can be easily operated. Furthermore, the state of the operation means changes from the housed state to the protruding state, so that the player can feel a sense of superiority and satisfaction due to the ability to operate the operation means.

Means A-19. An opening / closing means capable of changing a state between a closed state covering at least a part of the operation surface of the operation unit and an open state not covering the operation surface;
When changing the state of the open / close means in the open state to the closed state, it is confirmed that there is no detection by the operation detection means and no detection by the proximity detection means. The game machine according to any one of means A-14 to A-18, wherein the state change is started.

  According to the means A-19, the opening / closing means is closed after it is confirmed that the player's hand or the like is not close to the operation unit. For this reason, the situation where the opening-and-closing member which changes a state into a closed state contacts a player's hand can be avoided more reliably. Further, by covering the operation unit with the opening / closing means, it is possible to refrain from operating the operation section itself, and it is possible to reduce the operation frequency of the operation means (the number of operations of the operation section). As a result, the durability of the operation means can be improved (deterioration of the operation means can be delayed), and the situation where the operation means is deteriorated / damaged and the game is hindered is prevented. Can do.

Means A-20. The operation detection means includes a piezoelectric means having a piezoelectric body,
The gaming machine according to any one of means A-1 to A-19, wherein pressure is applied to the piezoelectric means by operating the operation portion toward the operation position. .

  According to the means A-20, for example, the operation of the operation unit can be detected by the voltage generated by applying pressure to the piezoelectric means. Therefore, energy for operating the operating means can be used for detecting an operation on the operating means without wasting it. Further, for example, it is possible to generate a sound by applying a voltage that changes at a predetermined cycle to the piezoelectric means and vibrate the piezoelectric means, or to change the feeling of operating the operation unit.

  The electric power generated by electrically connecting the piezoelectric means and an electric device such as a lamp and operating the operation unit many times may be used for the electric device. In addition, when it is desired to grasp that the operation unit has been operated continuously for a predetermined period, it is possible to use another detection means such as an optical sensor or an electric switch instead of the piezoelectric means, or to use it together. desirable.

Means A-21. Multiple reels that rotate based on the operation of the start lever,
A stop button provided corresponding to each reel individually,
When the operation of the stop button is performed in a state where the reel is rotating, the reel is stopped in a mode according to the result of the lottery performed with the operation of the start lever as an opportunity,
Depending on the order in which the stop buttons are operated (with the reel rotating), different controls can be executed,
Any one of means A-1 to A-20, wherein a proximity detecting means capable of detecting in advance an action to operate the stop button is provided corresponding to each stop button individually. The gaming machine described in 1.

  Conventional slot machines that use medals as game media can be handled by rotating multiple reels based on the operation of the start lever and operating multiple stop buttons provided for each reel. The reel to be played is stopped. By the way, in recent years, a child role that is not won unless a plurality of stop buttons are operated in a predetermined order is set, and as a kind of state advantageous to the player, when such a child role is established, the order in which the stop buttons are operated ( Some have so-called assist time (AT) gameability such as navigating the pressing order. With the introduction of such gameability, if the operation is not performed in the order navigated due to an operation error or the like, the number of medals that can be acquired by the player is reduced, or a state advantageous to the player (for example, In addition to navigating in the push order, there is a possibility that an unfavorable situation may occur for the player, such as an assist replay time (ART) in which the probability of replay is high is interrupted or terminated.

  Also, in order to increase the number of medals earned at AT and ART without increasing the number of medals earned during normal times, the order of pressing the stop buttons is also defined during normal times (for example, the stop button operated first) If the player performs an operation that violates the rules, the player moves to a state that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, a non-lottery state in which a bonus or the like called a penalty is not performed). Some will end up.

  Of course, if you play a game with caution, you can proceed with the game without any problems. However, if your attention is distracted, you may make a mistake. Furthermore, although there are cases where a warning sound is generated when the stop button is operated by mistake, there is a possibility that the state may already be changed to an unfavorable state for the player when the stop button is pressed by mistake.

  In this regard, according to this means A-21, the proximity detection means is provided corresponding to each stop button, and the navigation is performed in the situation where the order (push order) operated by the stop buttons is navigated. When a player's finger close to a stop button different from the order is detected, a warning sound can be generated. Thereby, it becomes possible to avoid operating the wrong stop button, and it is possible to prevent a player's disadvantage caused by operating the wrong button.

  Means A-22. The order in which the stop buttons are operated includes a first operation order and a second operation order that is less preferable for the player than the first operation order, and the stop button is the second operation order. The game machine according to means A-21, wherein a warning announcement is derived when an action to operate is detected by the proximity detection means corresponding to the stop button.

  According to the means A-22, it is possible to more reliably prevent a situation in which the stop buttons are operated in the wrong order.

  Means A-23. The gaming machine according to means A-21 or A-22, wherein the proximity detection means is installed directly behind the stop button.

  According to the means A-23, it is possible to reduce a situation where an operation different from the operation to the corresponding stop button is detected. The proximity detection means may be unitized (built in) with a stop button. In this case, it is possible to improve the mounting workability during manufacturing.

Means B-1. A plurality of motion detection means capable of detecting a player's motion;
An operation storage area capable of storing a combination (and order) of the detection of the operation detection means,
A game machine characterized in that, in determining an effect performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the storage information in the motion storage area is taken into consideration, and the effect is determined according to the storage information in the motion storage area.

  According to the means B-1, causing the action detecting means to detect the player's action is an input operation for determining the effect pattern performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the action of the player An effect corresponding to the combination (and order) of the detection of the motion detection means that detects the above is executed. For this reason, the player's input operation itself can be made various, not all-inclusive, and the effects performed in response to the player's operation input can be made more diverse, and thus correspond to the player's actions. Since the effect can be derived, it is possible to derive the effect that the player can more easily empathize with. Therefore, it is possible to give a novel interesting aspect regarding the input operation by the player, and to perform more various effects closer to the player. As a result, it is possible to suppress a monotonous feeling of the game and to improve the interest. Examples of the “production corresponding to the player's action” include, for example, that the character performs the same action as the player on the display device, or the reaction to the player's action.

  In addition, the arrangement of the motion detection means is relatively free, and by using the motion detection means scattered throughout the front of the gaming machine, an area that was conventionally only used for decoration or the like was also used. It is possible to perform a dynamic production using the full front of the gaming machine and provide a novel gameplay.

  Means B-2. A gaming machine according to means B-1, wherein a light emitting means is provided corresponding to each of the motion detecting means.

  According to the means B-2, the position of the motion detection means is suggested, a predetermined action is taken (implying the order of detection), or the detection is surely performed by the target motion detection means. It becomes possible to do. Therefore, it is possible to greatly help the player to understand the effect using the motion detection means.

Means B-3. A detection information internal determination unit that determines a combination (and order) of detection of the operation detection unit when a condition that enables detection information by the operation detection unit to be stored in the operation storage area is satisfied;
The detection combination (and order) of the motion detection means stored in the motion storage area matches the detection combination (and order) of the motion detection means determined by the detection information internal determination means. A match determining means for determining whether or not
When the affirmative determination is made by the coincidence determination means, processing different from the case where a negative determination is made is executed.

  According to the means B-3, the playability using the motion detection means can be further improved.

Means B-4. The motion detection means is arranged so as to be able to identify the absence of the player who sits in front of the gaming machine and plays the game,
When a player's absence is confirmed by the motion detection means during a teaching effect (variation display) that teaches the result of a predetermined lottery, the current state of the teaching effect is maintained from the point of confirmation ( (The variable display is not stopped and / or the effect accompanying the variable display is paused)
The teaching effect is resumed (becomes advancing) when the player's seating is confirmed (by detection of the motion detection means, operation of an operation means operable by the player, etc.). A gaming machine according to any one of means B-1 to B-3.

  According to the means B-4, when the user wants to go to a toilet or a mobile phone call during the teaching effect (variation display), the user can leave the seat without worrying about the teaching effect. Therefore, the convenience can be dramatically improved.

  In addition, “the motion detection means is arranged so as to be able to identify the motion of the player to look back and / or the motion of the player to extend, and during the teaching effect (variation display) that teaches the result of the predetermined lottery, If the motion detection means confirms the player's turn-back action or the player's extension action, the current state of the teaching effect is maintained from the point of confirmation, and the player's seating is confirmed. The teaching effect may be resumed in the event that the In this case, while the player is looking away, he / she misses an announcement of a special gaming state that is a moment of joy for the player, an announcement of a game method, etc. (disadvantageous to the player if missed) The situation can be avoided.

  Means B-5. The motion detection means is arranged so as to be able to identify the motion that the player looks back and / or the motion that the player stretches, and the motion detection during the teaching effect (variation display) that teaches the result of a predetermined lottery When an action that the player looks back by means or an action that the player stretches is confirmed, there is a case where a definite suggestion effect indicating the result of the teaching effect is performed even though the teaching effect is being performed. A gaming machine according to any one of means B-1 to B-4.

  According to the means B-5, it is possible to increase the opportunities for the player to experience the fun that the player's own actions and effects are linked to each other, so that the game can be tackled more actively.

Means B-6. An operation speed measuring means for measuring a time from when the predetermined motion detection means is detected until another motion detection means is detected;
Any of means B-1 to B-5, further comprising an operation speed discriminating means for discriminating whether or not the time measured by the operation speed measuring means is equal to or longer than a predetermined first predetermined time. The gaming machine described in Crab.

  According to the means B-6, different effects are derived when the time measured by the operation speed measuring means is equal to or longer than the first specified time and when it is less than the first specified time (refer to different tables when determining the effect type). Can be configured. Therefore, the above-described effects such as production and diversification of the game performance can be achieved more reliably.

  In addition, “the number of times that the measurement time by the operation speed measurement unit is equal to or longer than the first specified time, and / or the number of times that the measurement time by the operation speed measurement unit is less than the first specified time. It is good also as providing the operation preference counting means which counts. In this case, by confirming the count value of the action preference counting means, the player's movement tendency can be grasped, and such tendency can be reflected in effects and the like.

Means B-7. The player's baggage is left in the baggage storage section where the player can carry or lock the baggage carried by the player, and / or a gaming machine or a gaming assist device (card) adjacent to the gaming machine Unit, etc.), and stores the number of game values possessed by the player, and includes forgotten thing detection means for detecting that the player has left a portable storage medium,
In the state in which the forgotten object detection means is being detected, the player's leaving motion (for example, a change from a gaming posture to a standing posture or disappearing from the front of the gaming machine) is detected by the motion detection means. The gaming machine according to any one of means B-1 to B-6, characterized in that a notification by a predetermined notification means is performed in the event of a failure.

  According to the means B-7, misplacement of the player's baggage can be prevented. Further, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the storage medium is taken away when the player leaves the seat in the toilet or the like. Further, in this means, the notification by the predetermined notification means is performed only when the player leaves the seat using the detection information by the motion detection means. For this reason, if the baggage depositing unit is used or the storage medium is inserted into the game assisting device, it is possible to avoid an unpleasant situation where the notification means is always in the notification state. In addition, if there is a baggage custody part, a place where an umbrella or a cigarette can be placed in a gaming machine is convenient.

  Means B-8. When a predetermined condition is established and it is determined that a predetermined process is to be executed, when a player participates in an effect performed based on detection by the motion detection means, In comparison, the gaming machine according to any one of the means B-1 to B-7, wherein the player may be taught at an earlier timing that the predetermined process is executed.

  According to the means B-8, participation in the production performed based on the detection of the action detection means can be promoted. Furthermore, since it is possible to give a reason for participation in the production performed based on the detection of the motion detection means, it becomes easier for the player to participate in such production both externally and internally, It is possible to know the fun of the presentation performed based on the detection of the motion detection means.

  In addition, “It is a configuration that is given or given by participating in the production using the motion detection means, and is given when the production is performed using the motion detection means. It is good also as "displaying the lineup of the privilege to be performed". Even in this case, it is possible to improve the willingness to participate in the production using the motion detection means.

Means B-9. Operation means provided at a position operable by the player;
And an operation detection means for detecting an operation on the operation means,
The gaming machine according to any one of means B-1 to B-8, wherein the motion detection means includes proximity detection means capable of detecting a motion to operate the operation means.

  According to the means B-9, it is possible to detect in advance that there is an operation on the operation means, and therefore it is possible to perform an effect using the information. For example, based on the detection by the proximity detection means, before performing the operation of the operation means, an effect related to the effect performed when there is an operation of the operation means is performed, or the aspect of the operation means itself is changed. be able to. In addition, for example, based on the detection information of the proximity detection means and the operation detection means, it is possible to grasp that the player's hand is present near the operation means although the operation means is not operated. You can expand the production. Therefore, it is possible to give a novel interestingness to the operation of the operation means and diversify the production and the playability. As a result, it is possible to suppress a monotonous feeling of the game and to improve the interest.

  In addition, in the case of an operation effect for operating the operation means, when a prior effect that changes the mode of the operation means or suggests a result in accordance with the operation of the operation means is performed, the start timing of the prior effect applied by the gaming machine May be determined too early or too late with respect to the operation timing of the operation means. That is, there is a concern that if the timing of the pre-production is too early, the player may be easily noticed, or the interval from the operation of the operation means will be too wide to rise. On the other hand, if the timing of the preliminary presentation is too late (for example, the preliminary presentation is started when the operation means is slightly touched), there is a concern that there will be no time delay for performing the preliminary presentation at all. On the other hand, such an inconvenience can be eliminated by causing the mode change to be executed slightly before the operation to the operation unit triggered by the detection of the proximity detection unit. Therefore, the timings of the pre-production and the operation presentation can be perfectly matched, and the player's feelings can be more reliably enhanced by such a series of flowing presentations. Furthermore, although the operation effect for operating the operation means has been derived, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the pre-effect is performed wastefully when the player does not operate the operation means.

  As an effect related to the effect performed when the operation unit is operated before the operation unit is operated based on the detection by the proximity detection unit, for example, a predetermined logo type is displayed on a predetermined display device. In a configuration in which a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player occurs when the logo type is displayed in black and white and triggered by the operation of the operation means, the logo type is triggered by detection by the proximity detection means. You may comprise so that an effect display may be performed around a type. In addition, the aspect of the operation means that is in an unoperated state after the detection of the proximity detection means based on the detection of the proximity detection means and without the detection of the operation detection means. It may be configured to be changeable. In this case, for example, the operation unit operated by the player among the operation means is configured so that it can be moved in and out without being operated, and when the proximity detection means is detected, before the player touches the operation means, The operating means may be configured to protrude from the reference position or retract from the reference position. Furthermore, for example, when the operation means has a built-in light emitting means, and at least a part of the operation means is made of a transparent or translucent material capable of transmitting the light of the light emitting means, and there is detection by the proximity detection means, The light emitting means may be configured to emit light in a predetermined manner before the player touches the operation means. Also, the light emitting means may include a plurality of light sources, or may include a driving means such as a motor so that the light emitting means can be displaced such as rotating.

  As the operation means, for example, in a pachinko machine, for example, a display button or a handle for changing the display content of a predetermined display device or flowing a predetermined sound according to the operation can be cited. Speaking of machines, there are bet buttons, stop buttons, start levers, etc. for betting credited medals. The proximity detection means may generally be a player's hand that approaches (closes to) the operation means in order to operate the operation means, but other things (for example, games) The elbow of the player, the plastic bottle held by the player, etc.).

Means B-10. An operation speed measuring means for measuring a time from when the proximity detecting means is detected until an operation to the operating means is detected;
The gaming machine according to means B-9, further comprising operation speed discriminating means for discriminating whether or not the time measured by the operation speed measuring means is equal to or longer than a predetermined second predetermined time.

  According to the means B-10, different effects are derived when the time measured by the operation speed measuring means is equal to or longer than the second specified time and when it is less than the second specified time (refer to different tables when determining the effect type). Can be configured. Therefore, the above-described effects such as production and diversification of the game performance can be achieved more reliably.

  In addition, an operation time measurement unit that measures the time during which the operation detection unit is continuously detected is provided, and when the effect is determined based on the operation of the operation unit, the measurement time by the operation time measurement unit is determined in advance. It is possible to determine whether or not it is longer than the predetermined time and determine the effect according to the determination result.

  Means B-11. Count the number of times that the measurement time by the operation speed measurement means is equal to or longer than the second specified time, and / or the number of times that the measurement time by the operation speed measurement means is less than the second specified time. The gaming machine according to means B-10, comprising operation preference counting means.

  According to the means B-11, by confirming the count value of the operation preference counting means, it is possible to grasp the tendency of the player's operation method to the operation means, that is, the player's hobby preference regarding the operation of the operation means. The hobby preference can be reflected in the production related to the operation of the operation means. For example, in the case where the operation preference count means is the first number or more, that is, for a player who operates the operation means after waiting for a predetermined time in the vicinity of the operation means before operating the operation means, A state in which the occurrence of a special gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, jackpot state, probability change mode, time reduction mode, bonus, assist replay time) has been determined (however, the special gaming state has not yet started and teaching In the state of not being operated), as described above, by operating the operating means after waiting for a predetermined time in the vicinity of the operating means before operating the operating means, the occurrence of the special gaming state is quickly taught. It can also be configured as follows. As a result, the player can realize that such a notification effect is derived (reflected) just because of his own operation, and can obtain a sense of fulfillment and achievement. .

  Means B-12. The proximity detection means is composed of at least two sensors attached in different directions, and when the plurality of sensors constituting the proximity detection means are simultaneously detected, the proximity detection means has detected. A gaming machine according to any one of means B-9 to B-11.

  According to the means B-12, it is possible to three-dimensionally detect a player's hand or the like approaching the operating means to operate the operating means. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a player's motion unrelated to the operation on the operation means is detected.

Means B-13. In a configuration in which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out by the payout means when the game balls win the winning means provided in the game area where the game balls launched by the shooting means are guided,
A storage supply portion in which a storage concave portion for storing the game ball paid out from the payout means and guiding the stored game ball toward the launching means side is formed,
The gaming machine according to any one of means B-9 to B-12, wherein the operation means and the proximity detection means are arranged behind the storage recess.

  According to the means B-13, the player manually supplies the game ball to the storage supply unit (transfers the game ball from the so-called dollar box or lower plate to the upper plate as the storage supply unit), or from the storage supply unit to the game When a ball is taken out (a game ball is taken out from the upper plate as a storage supply unit when using a coffee service or the like), the player's hand performing such an operation is detected by the proximity detection means. Such a situation can be suppressed. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the proximity detection unit detects an operation unrelated to the operation unit and the control related to the operation of the operation unit is executed.

Means B-14. The operation means includes
An operation unit that is provided so as to be relatively displaceable with respect to the front portion of the gaming machine, and that is displaced between an operation position when operated and a non-operation position when not operated;
Urging means for urging the operation portion toward the non-operation position side,
The gaming machine according to any one of means B-9 to B-13, wherein the operation detection means detects that the operation portion has been displaced to the operation position.

  The operation means includes a light-emitting means, and at least a part of the operation unit has translucency so that light from the light-emitting means can be transmitted to the outside of the operation means. It is good.

  Means B-15. The operating means changes the magnitude of the stress acting on the operating portion when operating the operating portion at the non-operating position to displace the operating portion toward the operating position (to the non-operating position). Means B-14 comprising an operation force adjusting means capable of changing a magnitude of a force required to operate a certain operation part to displace the operation part to the operation position side. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the means B-15, the operating force adjusting means can change the stress acting on the operating portion when the operating portion is displaced toward the operating position. For this reason, it is possible to obtain a novel operation means in which the feeling when the player operates the operation unit changes. Therefore, by mounting the operation means on the gaming machine, it is possible to enhance the production effect and further enhance the interest for the player.

  In addition, since a novel phenomenon as described above (change in feel when operating the operation unit) can occur in the operation means that the player has been less interested in, conventionally, the player has a fresh surprise, Interested in the operation means itself. As a result, a dramatic improvement in interest can be achieved. Furthermore, it is possible to perform an effect (such as suggestion or teaching of various game states) using a change in feel when the operation unit is operated, and the possibility of an effect that can be performed on the gaming machine can be expanded.

Means B-16. A first passage for discharging the air pushed out by the operation unit to the back side of the gaming machine when the operation unit is operated and displaced to the operation position;
A second passage for discharging the air pushed out by the operation unit to the front side of the gaming machine;
Among the air pushed out by the operation unit, the flow rate changing means is provided that can change the ratio of the amount of air guided to the first passage and the amount of air guided to the second passage. A gaming machine according to the feature A-14 or A-15.

  According to the means B-16, when the player operates the operation unit, it is possible to produce an effect that air blows out to the front side of the gaming machine in which the player is present. In addition, the amount of blowout can be adjusted, and the performance can be improved. It should be noted that “the second guide passage is configured so that the discharged air can be blown to the player so that the player can experience the air blown out more reliably. It may be "being". For example, the second guide passage may be communicated with the operating means or the peripheral portion thereof, and air may be blown by the operation of the operating means to the hand operating the operating means.

  In addition, regarding the means B-15, “an air pump that sends air to the operation means side through the first passage” may be provided. By adopting this configuration, it is possible to change the force required to operate the operation unit, or to vibrate the operation unit (send air intermittently at a rapid pitch). Furthermore, “the air pump may be operated at a timing triggered by the detection of the proximity detection unit”. That is, if the operation timing of the air pump is too early, there is a concern that the player will notice the change of the operation means, and if the operation timing of the air pump is too late, the supply of air is There is concern about not being in time for the operation. On the other hand, such an inconvenience can be eliminated by operating the air pump slightly before the operation to the operation unit triggered by the detection of the proximity detection means.

Means B-17. The operation means includes
A main body portion that is provided so as to be relatively displaceable with respect to the front surface portion of the gaming machine and that supports the operation portion so as to be relatively displaceable;
Drive means capable of driving the main body part in both directions on the operation position side and the non-operation position side along the displacement direction of the operation part;
Any one of means B-14 to B-16, wherein when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the drive means drives the main body based on detection information of the proximity detection means and the operation detection means. The gaming machine described.

  According to the means B-17, it is possible to obtain an operating means from which a novel aspect such as displacement of the operating portion is derived based on the detection information of the proximity detecting means and the operation detecting means. For example, triggered by the detection of the proximity detection means, the drive means drives the main body part to the non-operation position side, and an effect by the operation means that causes the operation part to escape even if the player tries to operate the operation part is performed. Can do. Furthermore, for example, when the state of the proximity detection unit and the detection of the operation detection unit is changed to a state where the detection of the operation detection unit is performed, the drive unit moves the main body to the operation position side. It is possible to produce an effect by operating means such that the player has released his hand from the operation unit but has not left.

  Means B-18. When the main body is driven by the driving means, the operating state of the operating unit at the non-operating position protrudes outward from the front part of the gaming machine, and the operating surface of the operating unit is The gaming machine according to means A-17, wherein the gaming machine is configured to be changeable to a housed state housed inside the front portion of the gaming machine.

  According to the means B-18, the effect of the operation means using the displacement of the main body can be performed more dynamically. Further, by setting the operation unit in the housed state, it is possible to make it difficult to operate the operation unit. For example, it is difficult to perform an action such as slamming the operation unit with a palm or a grasped hand. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player's excessive operation to the operation unit (suppress the act of slamming the operation unit), and the operation means is deteriorated early or damaged. Can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, since the operation surface of the operation portion protrudes outward from the front surface portion of the gaming machine by setting the operation portion to the protruding state, the operation portion can be easily operated. Furthermore, the state of the operation means changes from the housed state to the protruding state, so that the player can feel a sense of superiority and satisfaction due to the ability to operate the operation means.

Means B-19. An opening / closing means capable of changing a state between a closed state covering at least a part of the operation surface of the operation unit and an open state not covering the operation surface;
When changing the state of the open / close means in the open state to the closed state, it is confirmed that there is no detection by the operation detection means and no detection by the proximity detection means. The game machine according to any one of means B-14 to B-18, characterized in that a state change is started.

  According to the means B-19, the opening / closing means is closed after it is confirmed that the player's hand or the like is not close to the operation section. For this reason, the situation where the opening-and-closing member which changes a state into a closed state contacts a player's hand can be avoided more reliably. Further, by covering the operation unit with the opening / closing means, it is possible to refrain from operating the operation section itself, and it is possible to reduce the operation frequency of the operation means (the number of operations of the operation section). As a result, the durability of the operation means can be improved (deterioration of the operation means can be delayed), and the situation where the operation means is deteriorated / damaged and the game is hindered is prevented. Can do.

Means B-20. The operation detection means includes a piezoelectric means having a piezoelectric body,
The gaming machine according to any one of means B-9 to B-19, wherein pressure is applied to the piezoelectric means by operating the operation portion to the operation position side. .

  According to the means B-20, for example, the operation of the operation unit can be detected by the voltage generated by applying pressure to the piezoelectric means. Therefore, energy for operating the operating means can be used for detecting an operation on the operating means without wasting it. Further, for example, it is possible to generate a sound by applying a voltage that changes at a predetermined cycle to the piezoelectric means and vibrate the piezoelectric means, or to change the feeling of operating the operation unit.

  The electric power generated by electrically connecting the piezoelectric means and an electric device such as a lamp and operating the operation unit many times may be used for the electric device. In addition, when it is desired to grasp that the operation unit has been operated continuously for a predetermined period, it is possible to use another detection means such as an optical sensor or an electric switch instead of the piezoelectric means, or to use it together. desirable.

Means B-21 Operation input state switching means for switching between an operation valid state when the detection of the operation detection means is triggered by a predetermined state change and an operation invalid state where the detection of the operation detection means is not triggered by a state change. Prepared,
The gaming machine according to any one of means B-1 to B-20, wherein whether or not the action detecting means has been detected is checked only in the action enabled state.

  For example, it is difficult to determine whether or not the operation is always in an effective state, and particularly when the number of operation detecting means is large, such a concern becomes more prominent. In this regard, according to the present means, the detection of the motion detection means is confirmed only when the motion is valid. Thereby, simplification of the processing can be achieved.

Means B-22. It is equipped with an accessory provided at a position that can be seen from the player and cannot be contacted,
The gaming machine according to any one of means B-1 to B-21, characterized in that the mode of the accessory can be changed in accordance with a combination of detections of the motion detection means.

  According to the means B-22, it is possible to derive a novel effect in which an accessory is displaced according to the player's action. In addition, for example, in the front where a pair of left and right motion detection means are arranged, the player can move the hand from left to right, so that the accessory tilts to the right side. By determining the degree of displacement based on this, it becomes possible to perform a more complicated operation (as if the player is remotely controlled by the player's operation).

Means C-1. Operation means provided on the front side of the gaming machine;
An operation detection means for detecting an operation on the operation means,
The operation means includes
An operation unit that displaces between an operation position when operated and a non-operation position when not operated,
The operation detection means is configured to detect that the operation unit is displaced to the operation position,
The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the operation means includes a drive means capable of displacing the operation portion at the non-operation position.

  According to the means C-1, even if the player does not operate the operation unit, the operation unit may be displaced. This makes it possible to diversify the modes of the operation means, and to perform a novel effect using the operation means itself. Therefore, it is possible to give a novel interestingness to the operation of the operation means and diversify the production and the playability. As a result, it is possible to suppress a monotonous feeling of the game and to improve the interest.

Means C-2. Equipped with motion detection means capable of detecting the player's motion,
The driving means is driven based on the detection by the operation detecting means in an operation valid state in which a predetermined process (for example, a process for executing a predetermined effect) is executed based on the detection of the operation detecting means. The gaming machine according to means C-1, which is controlled.

  According to the means C-2, the mode of the operation means can be set to a mode corresponding to (reflected from) the action of the player. Therefore, the player can be interested in the association between the operation of the player and the operation means, and as a result, the interest can be improved.

Means C-3. The motion detection means is arranged to detect a motion to operate the operation means,
The drive means is triggered by the detection by the motion detection means, and the drive is started when the proximity detection means is detected and then the operation detection means is not detected. -2 gaming machine.

  According to the means C-3, it can be known in advance that the player is going to operate the operating means. This suggests the result of operating the operating means when the player changes his / her aspect or detects the operation of operating the operating means while the player is reaching out to operate the operating means. It can be configured such that the production is derived. Therefore, the production can be diversified and the interest can be improved. In addition, when the operation means is set to the operation enabled state or when the mode of the operation means is changed after a predetermined time using a timer, the timing is arbitrarily determined on the gaming machine side. It may not match well with the excitement of feelings. In this regard, the present means is configured to change the mode of the operation means triggered by detection of the action of the player who wants to operate the operation means, so that such trouble can be eliminated, and the player's feelings and effects Can be matched well.

Means C-4. The operation means includes a main body provided to be relatively displaceable in a direction along a displacement direction of the operation portion with respect to the front portion of the gaming machine while supporting the operation portion so as to be relatively displaceable.
The drive means is configured to be able to displace the main body,
When the operation detection means is detected, it is configured to be able to start driving for displacing the main body portion to the operation position side when the operation detection means is not detected. A gaming machine according to means C-3.

  According to the means C-4, when the player tries to operate the operation means and brings a hand or the like close to the operation means, the operation unit escapes from the player's hand even though it is not operated, An effect such as displacement to the operation position side can be executed. Thus, when the operation unit performs a novel operation, it is possible to give a stimulus to the game, improve interest in the operation means, and as a result, improve the interest. Further, by displacing the main body portion toward the operation position, the operation portion can be displaced toward the operation position without displacing the operation portion at the non-operation position toward the operation position. For this reason, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the operation detection means is detected even though the player does not directly operate the operation unit.

  Note that, “when the predetermined condition is satisfied and the operation detection means is detected, the drive means moves the operation portion to the position where the operation detection means detects. It may be configured to be displaceable to the side. In this case, it is possible to reliably derive an effect that is performed when the operation unit is operated (switched on). Therefore, even if the player is confused by the unexpected operation of being retracted before touching, and the player forgets to operate the operation unit unexpectedly, an effect corresponding to the operation of the operation means can be reliably derived. Can do. Further, when such a configuration is adopted, “the detection of the operation detection unit is performed by driving the driving unit, and the operation detection unit is detected by the player operating the operation unit”. In other words, the corresponding control (selected effect) performed based on the detection of the operation detection unit is different from the case where the operation detection unit is detected in a state where the drive unit is not driven. It is good also as. In this case, it is possible to further diversify and differentiate (weight) the effects. Further, “when the predetermined condition is satisfied and the operation detection means is detected, the operation unit is further restricted from being displaced toward the operation position by the drive means. It is good also as displacing to the said operation position side to a position (bottom-bottom). In addition, the entire operation unit may be more immersed than the surface of the operation unit. In this case, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the operation unit is struck by an excited player and the operation unit is damaged.

Means C-5. The motion detection means is arranged to be able to detect an object close to the operation means,
In a state where the main body is displaced to the operation position side by the drive means, when the detection by the motion detection means arranged to detect an object close to the operation means is no longer performed, The game machine according to means C-4, wherein the driving means displaces the main body portion toward the non-operation position (returns to the original reference position).

  According to the means C-5, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the operation part that protrudes and displaces and the player's hand or the like come into contact.

  Means C-6. After the operation detection means is detected, when the operation detection means is no longer detected, the operation unit is driven in the direction along the displacement direction of the operation unit by driving the drive unit. The gaming machine according to any one of means C-3 to C-5, wherein the gaming machine is configured to be able to protrude larger from the front surface of the gaming machine.

  According to the means C-6, when the player operates the operation part of the operation means and then tries to release his / her hand from the operation part, an effect that the operation part sticks to the player's hand can be executed. it can. Thus, when the operation unit performs a novel operation, it is possible to give a stimulus to the game, improve interest in the operation means, and as a result, improve the interest. The operation unit is configured to protrude when the player's hand is separated from the operation unit. That is, as in the case of projecting the operation unit triggered by detecting the player's hand approaching the operation unit by the motion detection means, the hand approaching the player's operation unit and the operation unit that projects and displaces It is possible to avoid a situation where a collision occurs at an unexpected angle.

  Means C-7. Means C-3 to C-3, wherein the suggestion effect suggesting a gaming state due to the displacement of the operation unit is executable when the detection by the motion detection means is continuously performed for a predetermined time. The gaming machine according to any one of C-6.

  According to the means C-7, it is possible to increase the number of patterns in which the mode of the operating means changes reflecting the player's action. In addition, the player can feel that a change in the mode of the corresponding operation means is caused by his / her own movement, and as a result, the interest can be improved.

Means C-8. A blower as the drive means capable of supplying air into the operation means;
The operation unit in the non-operation position is configured to be displaceable to the operation position side, and is configured to be displaceable to the side opposite to the operation position side,
Means C- is characterized in that, by supplying air to the inside of the operating means by the blower, the operating portion at the non-operating position can be displaced to the side opposite to the operating position side. The gaming machine according to any one of 1 to C-7.

  According to the means C-8, the mode of the operating means can be changed by using a blower, such as causing the operating part to protrude relatively large or vibrating the operating part. In particular, by using a blower, the operation unit can be protruded faster and more quickly than when the operation unit is protruded by a motor or the like. Therefore, the operation unit can be quickly projected by the blower, and an effect that can give more impact can be performed. A motor, a solenoid, or the like may be provided as a driving unit. In other words, a motor or the like may be more suitable for operating the operation unit finely (such as returning after a slight protrusion or gradually decreasing the protruding speed). Further diversification can be achieved.

Means D-1. Operation means provided at a position operable by the player;
Operation detecting means for detecting an operation on the operating means;
A blowing means capable of blowing air from the front side of the gaming machine toward the outside of the gaming machine,
A gaming machine configured to be able to blow out air by the blowing means based on an operation to the operating means.

  According to the means D-1, it is possible to derive an effect of blowing wind as part of the effect related to the operation of the operation means. As a result, it is possible to increase the production variation when operating the operation means, and to match the expectation for the occurrence of a special gaming state advantageous to the player with whether or not there is blown air, It can also be improved. Therefore, it is possible to give a novel interestingness to the operation of the operation means and diversify the production and the playability. As a result, it is possible to suppress a monotonous feeling of the game and to improve the interest.

Means D-2. The operation means includes
An operation unit that displaces between an operation position when operated and a non-operation position when not operated (and
Urging means for urging the operation portion toward the non-operation position side)
The blower means is provided on the front side of the gaming machine, a blowout port through which air is blown out toward the outside of the gaming machine, an air supply source capable of supplying air to the blowout port, the air supply source, A communication pipe that communicates with the air outlet;
The game machine according to means D-1, wherein the air supply source is configured by the operation means, and when the operation section is operated, air pushed away by the operation section is ejected from the blowout hole .

  According to the means D-2, it is possible to perform an effect of switching between a state where air is blown out to the front side of the gaming machine where the player is present and a state where it is not blown out according to the operation of the operation unit by the player. . Therefore, the player can be surprised that the wind is generated by operating the operation unit of the player, and can increase the expectation for the occurrence of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

  Means D-3. The air blowing means is provided on the front side of the gaming machine and serves as an air outlet from which air is blown out toward the outside of the gaming machine and an air supply source that is electrically driven and controlled and can supply air to the air outlet. The game machine according to means D-1 or D-2, characterized in that the game machine includes a communication pipe that communicates the blower with the air outlet.

  According to the means D-3, the air can be blown out from the outlet through the blower with certainty and the air volume (wind pressure) can be adjusted. In addition, an air pump, a fan, etc. are mentioned as an air blower. Further, soundproofing measures may be taken for the blower so that it is difficult to realize that the blower is driven by the drive sound.

Means D-4. It is configured to be able to supply air from the blower to the operation means,
The gaming machine according to means D-3, wherein a feeling when the operation unit is operated is changed by supplying air to the operation means by the blower.

  According to the means D-4, the feeling of operating the operating means can be changed using a blower. That is, when the air pressure inside the operation means is increased, it becomes difficult to push in the operation portion, or the air is vibrated by intermittently sending air. Therefore, it is possible to further diversify the production using the operation means and the air blowing means.

Means D-5. It is configured to be able to supply air from the blower to the operation means,
The operation unit at the non-operation position is configured to be displaceable to the operation position side and is configured to be displaceable to the side opposite to the operation position side,
Means D-3 or D-3 characterized in that the operation part at the non-operation position can be displaced to the side opposite to the operation position side by supplying air to the operation means by the blower. A gaming machine according to D-4.

  According to the means D-5, the mode of the operation means can be changed by using a blower, such as causing the operation part to protrude relatively large or vibrating the operation part. In particular, by using a blower, the operation unit can be protruded faster and more quickly than when the operation unit is protruded by a motor or the like. Therefore, the operation unit can be quickly projected by the blower, and an effect that can give more impact can be performed.

Means D-6. Proximity detection means capable of detecting an operation to operate the operation means,
The gaming machine according to any one of means D-3 to D-5, wherein the blower is configured to be able to start driving when triggered by the proximity detection means.

  According to the means D-6, it is possible to produce an effect by blowing out air before the player operates the operating means. For this reason, the suggestion effect etc. which suggest the result at the time of operating an operation means, etc. can be performed, and diversification of an effect can be achieved.

  In addition, for example, when using the air blowing means such as the above-mentioned means D-4 to change the aspect of the operation means itself, the fan is driven after the operation detection means is detected. Then it is late and does not hold as production. On the other hand, if the blower is driven at the time when the effect that changes the aspect of the producing means itself is determined, there is a concern that the aspect change of the operating means may be easily exposed before the operating means is operated. Is done. In this regard, when the blower starts to be triggered by the detection of the proximity detection means, the effect using the air blowing means is sufficiently in time, and the effect is perceived before the operation to the operation means. Can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to surely enjoy the effect of changing the mode of the operating means using the air blowing means.

  Further, for example, normally, when air blows out from the outlet based on the operation of the operation means, a timing just before the player operates the operation means triggered by the detection of the proximity detection means as in this means. Thus, when air is blown from the outlet by driving the blower, the player can be surprised and have a sense of expectation with respect to the air blowing at a different timing. Therefore, the timing at which air blows out from the outlet can be made before the operation to the operation means, and the effect of using the air blowing means can be further enhanced.

  Means D-7. The gaming machine according to any one of means D-2 to D-6, wherein the outlet is formed at or near a part where a predetermined operation is performed by a player.

  According to the means D-7, it can be made easier for the player to notice that air is being blown out from the outlet. In the case of a pachinko machine, the parts that can be operated by the player include a handle, a ball lending button, an operation unit for removing the ball (a shutter that stops discharging the game ball from the upper plate and the lower plate). For opening the game ball from the upper plate to the lower plate or discharging the game ball downward from the lower plate), buttons for production, and the like. In the case of a slot machine, there are a stop button, a bet button, a start lever, a credit clearing button, a production button, a medal slot, and the like.

  Means D-8. The communication pipe passes through the first passage for communicating the air supply source and the outlet, the second passage for communicating the air supply source and the outside on the back side of the gaming machine, and the first passage. Means D-2 to D-7 comprising a first valve capable of adjusting the amount of air that can be passed and a second valve capable of adjusting the amount of air that can pass through the second passage. A gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the means D-8, it is possible to switch between a state where air is blown out from the blowing hole and a state where air is not blown out, or to change the amount of air blown out from the blowing port (wind pressure or the like).

Means D-9. A movable accessory provided at a position where it can be seen from the front of the gaming machine and cannot be contacted,
The communication pipe includes a third passage for communicating the air supply source and the movable accessory, and a third valve capable of adjusting the amount of air that can pass through the third valve,
The gaming machine according to means D-8, wherein the movable accessory is displaced by supplying air from the air supply source to the movable accessory via the third passage.

  According to the means D-9, the movable accessory can be displaced based on the operation of the operation means by the player. Furthermore, it is possible to switch between a state where the wind blows out from the outlet, a state where the movable accessory is displaced, a state where both of them are performed simultaneously, and a state where neither of them is performed. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the production.

  Means D-10. The gaming machine according to any one of means D-2 to D-9, wherein a shutter capable of changing an opening area of the outlet is provided.

  According to the means D-10, the momentum of the air ejected from the air outlet can be changed by changing the area of the air outlet. Moreover, the site | part from which air is blown out of a blower outlet can also be changed. Therefore, a change can be given to the mode of the air ejected from the outlet, and more various effects can be executed.

One type of gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a pachinko machine, when a game ball launched by a launching device enters a starting pitching means provided on a game board, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not a big hit state is generated, and a lottery is performed using a variable display device. Fluctuation display for teaching the result is performed (see, for example, JP-A-2003-154110).

In recent years, operation means has been provided in which contents such as effects are changed or choices are determined by a player's operation.

However, in recent years, operating devices are generally provided, and any gaming machine maker produces effects according to the operation of similar operating devices. There is a risk. Note that the above-described problem is not limited to pachinko machines, but also applies to other gaming machines such as slot machines.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of giving a novel and interesting to an input operation.

Means E-1. Operation means provided at a position operable by the player;
In a gaming machine comprising operation detection means for detecting an operation on the operation means,
A plurality of interlocking means mechanically interlocking with the displacement of the operation unit;
A gaming machine, comprising: a target switching means for switching the interlocking means interlocking with the displacement of the operation unit among the plurality of interlocking means.

  According to the means E-1, the player can enjoy the change of the aspect that the interlocking member interlocking with the operation is switched only by operating the same operation means. Therefore, it is possible to give a novel interest to the operation of the operation means without bothering the player's hand, and to diversify the production and game play. As a result, it is possible to suppress a monotonous feeling of the game and to improve the interest. Note that “interlocking” includes not only the case of displacement, but also the case of state change such as operation (change to a functional state).

Means E-2. The object switching means includes a first interlocking state in which the first interlocking means is interlocked when the operation means is operated, and a second interlocking mechanism in which the second interlocking means is interlocked when the operation means is operated. It is configured to be switchable to the interlocking state,
Proximity detection means capable of detecting an operation to operate the operation means,
When it is determined to switch from the first interlocking state to the second interlocking state based on establishment of a predetermined condition, the target switching unit is triggered by detection by the proximity detection unit from the first interlocking state. The gaming machine according to means E-1, wherein the gaming machine is switched to the second interlocking state.

  If the timing of switching by the target switching means is too early relative to the timing at which the player operates the operating means, the switching sound by the target switching means will be easily noticed, or switching by the target switching means has been performed. However, there is a concern that the switching operation is wasted because the player has not operated the operation means. On the other hand, if the timing of switching by the target switching means is too late, there is a concern that the timing of operation of the operating means by the player may not be in time. On the other hand, according to the means E-2, switching by the object switching means can be executed at a timing just before the operation of the operation means is performed, and the above concerns can be eliminated.

  Note that “a measurement timer that measures the time during which the proximity detection means continuously performs detection is provided, and that the measurement value of the measurement timer is equal to or greater than a predetermined value is the first interlocking state. It may be an opportunity to switch from the second to the second interlocking state ”.

  Means E-3. The game according to means E-1 or E-2, wherein the object switching means is configured so that the operation of the operation means can be switched to a non-interlocking state that is not interlocked with any of the interlocking means. Machine.

  According to the means E-3, the variation when the operation means is operated can be increased, and the degree of expectation for the occurrence of a special gaming state advantageous to the player is associated with whether or not the interlocking means are interlocked. Thus, the playability can be improved.

Means E-4. Driving means capable of operating the interlocking means;
Proximity detection means capable of detecting an operation to operate the operation means,
The gaming machine according to any one of means E-1 to E-3, wherein the driving means is configured to be able to start driving in response to detection by the proximity detecting means.

  According to the means E-4, the operation can be started not only at the timing when the interlocking means is operated by the operation of the operating means but also at a timing just before the operating means is operated. Therefore, it is possible to increase the variation when operating the operation means and break down the mannerism, and to correspond the expectation for the occurrence of a special gaming state advantageous to the player and the timing at which the interlocking means operates, Gameability can be improved.

Means E-5. The object switching means includes a first interlocking state in which the first interlocking means is interlocked when the operation means is operated, and a second interlocking mechanism in which the second interlocking means is interlocked when the operation means is operated. It is configured to be switchable to the interlocking state,
Proximity detection means capable of detecting an operation to operate the operation means,
When the operation means is operated in a state where the first interlocking state is switched to the second interlocking state based on establishment of a predetermined condition,
When switching from the second interlocking state to the first interlocking state triggered by the fact that detection by the proximity detection means is no longer performed,
The device may switch from the second interlocking state to the first interlocking state when a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the first interlocking state is switched to the second interlocking state. The gaming machine according to any one of E-1 to E-4.

  According to the means E-5, in the second interlocking state, when the detection by the proximity detecting means is not performed, there are a case where the state immediately returns to the first interlocking state and a case where the state does not return immediately. As a result, when the operating means is operated again after releasing the hand from the operating means, a difference occurs in the interlocking interlocking means. Therefore, it is possible to increase the variation when operating the operation means, and to match the expectation for occurrence of a special gaming state advantageous to the player with whether or not the interlocking means to be linked changes. Can be improved.

Means E-6. The operation means includes
An operation unit that is provided so as to be relatively displaceable with respect to the front portion of the gaming machine, and that is displaced between an operation position when operated and a non-operation position when not operated;
Urging means for urging the operation portion toward the non-operation position side,
In the configuration in which the operation detection unit detects that the operation unit is displaced to the operation position.
A first passage for discharging the air pushed out by the operation unit to the back side of the gaming machine when the operation unit is operated and displaced to the operation position;
A second passage for discharging the air pushed out by the operation unit to the front side of the gaming machine;
A flow rate changing means capable of changing a ratio of the amount of air guided to the first passage and the amount of air guided to the second passage among the air pushed out by the operation unit;
The means according to any one of means E-1 to E-5, wherein the interlocking means is constituted by the first passage and the second passage, and the target switching means is constituted by the flow rate changing means. Gaming machine.

  According to the means E-6, when the player operates the operation unit, it is possible to perform an effect of switching between a state where air is blown out to the front side of the gaming machine in which the player is present and a state where no air is blown out. In addition, the amount of blowout can be adjusted, and the performance can be improved.

  It should be noted that “the second guide passage is configured so that the discharged air can be blown to the player so that the player can experience the air blown out more reliably. It may be "being". For example, the second guide passage may be communicated with the operating means or the peripheral portion thereof, and air may be blown by the operation of the operating means to the hand operating the operating means. Further, in correspondence with the means E-4, “an air pump for sending air to the second passage side via the first passage” may be provided.

Means E-7. The operation means includes
An operation unit that is provided so as to be relatively displaceable with respect to the front portion of the gaming machine, and that is displaced between an operation position when operated and a non-operation position when not operated;
Urging means for urging the operation portion toward the non-operation position side,
In the configuration in which the operation detection unit detects that the operation unit is displaced to the operation position.
A first movable accessory and a second movable accessory as the interlocking means;
A first interlocking member that interlocks with the first movable accessory;
A second interlocking member interlocking with the second movable accessory;
Transmission displaceable between a first transmission position where power due to displacement of the operation portion can be transmitted to the first interlocking member and a second transmission position where power due to operation of the operation portion can be transmitted to the second interlocking member. A member,
Transmission operation means for displacing the transmission member to the first transmission position and the second transmission position;
The gaming machine according to any one of means E-1 to E-6, wherein the object switching means is constituted by the transmission member and the transmission operation means.

  According to the means E-7, the player can perform an effect of switching between a state in which the first interlocking member is interlocked and a state in which the interlocking is not interlocked by operating the operation unit.

  Means F-1. In any one of the means A-1 to A-23, the means B-1 to B-22, the means C-1 to C-8, the means D-1 to D-10, the means E-1 to A gaming machine comprising any of E-7.

  Means F-2. In any one of the means B-1 to B-22, the means A-1 to A-23, the means C-1 to C-8, the means D-1 to D-10, the means E-1 to A gaming machine comprising any of E-7.

  Means F-3. In any one of the means C-1 to C-8, the means A-1 to A-23, the means B-1 to B-22, the means D-1 to D-10, the means E-1 to A gaming machine comprising any of E-7.

  Means F-4. In any one of the means D-1 to D-10, the means A-1 to A-23, the means B-1 to B-22, the means C-1 to C-8, the means E-1 to A gaming machine comprising any of E-7.

  Means F-5. In any one of the means E-1 to E-7, the means A-1 to A-23, the means B-1 to B-22, the means C-1 to C-8, and the means D-1 to A gaming machine comprising any one of D-10.

  The basic configuration of various gaming machines to which the above means are applied is shown below.

  A. The gaming machine in each of the above means is a ball game machine. As a more detailed mode example, “an operation means (game ball launching handle) operated by a player, a launching means (shot motor, etc.) for playing and launching a game ball based on an operation of the operation means, A ball ball game machine including a game area where a game ball is guided and each ball entry means (general prize opening, variable prize winning device, operation opening, etc.) arranged in the game area.

  B. The gaming machine in each of the above means is a bullet ball gaming machine having a gaming area extending in a substantially vertical direction. As a more detailed mode example, “an operation means (game ball launching handle) operated by a player, a launching means (shot motor, etc.) for playing and launching a game ball based on an operation of the operation means, The game balls are guided and extended along a substantially vertical direction (for example, the game area is constituted by a game board surface), and each ball entry means (general winning mouth, And a ball game machine configured to be able to visually recognize the behavior of a game ball flowing down the game area.

  C. The gaming machine in each of the above means or each of the above ball game machines is a pachinko machine or a gaming machine equivalent to a pachinko machine.

  D. The gaming machine in each of the above means is a revolving type gaming machine such as a slot machine. As a more detailed mode example, “a discriminating information string (a symbol string; specifically a rotating body such as a reel or a belt with a symbol) made up of a plurality of identification information (symbols) is variably displayed (specifically, a reel Variable display means (specifically, a rotating unit such as a reel unit) that stops and displays the identification information sequence after the rotation of the starting information means. The identification information (symbol) starts to fluctuate and the identification information (symbol) fluctuates due to the operation of the stop operation means (specifically, the stop button). A spinning-type gaming machine configured to be given game value on condition that the information is specific identification information.

  E. The gaming machine in each of the above means is a gaming machine of a type in which a slot machine and a pachinko machine are fused (especially a gaming machine of a slot machine specification that uses a gaming ball as a gaming medium). As a more detailed mode example, “a discriminating information string (a symbol string; specifically a rotating body such as a reel or a belt with a symbol) made up of a plurality of identification information (symbols) is variably displayed (specifically, a reel Variable display means (specifically, a rotating unit such as a reel unit) that stops and displays the identification information sequence after the rotation of the starting information means. The identification information (symbol) starts to fluctuate and the identification information (symbol) fluctuates due to the operation of the stop operation means (specifically, the stop button). The game value is provided on the condition that the information is specific identification information, and a ball receiving tray (upper plate or the like) is further provided, taking-in means for taking the game ball from the ball receiving tray, and the ball receiving tray Payout means for paying out game balls Comprising a configuration and gaming machine "and the like as starting condition of the game is satisfied by the game ball is captured by the capturing means.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine, 15 ... Lower plate, 19 ... Upper plate, 32 ... Variable winning device, 33 ... Start winning unit, 33a ... Upper winning port, 33b ... Lower winning port, 42 ... Decorative symbol display device, 43L, 43R ... Special display device, 46 ... Hold lamp, 120 ... Production button unit, 125 ... Production button, 224a, 224b ... Start winning switch, 261 ... Main control device, 262 ... Sub control device, 405 ... Main unit, 406 ... Operation unit, 427 ... Operation detection sensor, 432 ... Exhaust passage, AE1 ... Unit side proximity detection sensor, AE2 ... Frame side proximity detection sensor, ME1 to ME10 ... Motion detection sensor.

Claims (3)

Operation means provided at a position operable by the player;
In a gaming machine comprising operation detection means for detecting an operation on the operation means,
A plurality of interlocking means mechanically interlocking with the displacement of the operation unit;
A gaming machine, comprising: a target switching means for switching the interlocking means interlocking with the displacement of the operation unit among the plurality of interlocking means. The object switching means includes a first interlocking state in which the first interlocking means is interlocked when the operation means is operated, and a second interlocking mechanism in which the second interlocking means is interlocked when the operation means is operated. It is configured to be switchable to the interlocking state,
Proximity detection means capable of detecting an object located in a space within a predetermined range with respect to the operation means,
When it is determined to switch from the first interlocking state to the second interlocking state based on establishment of a predetermined condition, the target switching unit is triggered by detection by the approach detection unit from the first interlocking state. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is switched to the second interlocking state. 3. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the target switching unit is configured to be able to switch the operation of the operation unit to a non-linked state that is not linked to any of the linked units.